Mitsubishi Electric Sanda Works NR207UHD Multimedia Car Radio User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1876518
Application ID	Zy9VYFWQkBbBFkd0R2sjIw==
Document Description	user manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	464.32kB (5803995 bits)
Date Submitted	2013-01-09 00:00:00
Date Available	2013-04-10 00:00:00
Creation Date	2012-12-20 15:32:49
Producing Software	Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2012-12-20 15:32:49
Document Title	user manual
Document Creator	XSL Formatter V4.3 MR8a (4,3,2009,0731) for Windows
Document Author:	Owner: y.io.creator

COMAND Online
Supplement
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be
helpful to you.
This symbol designates an instruction you must follow.
Several consecutive symbols indiX
cate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find further information on a
topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or
YY
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This text indicates a message on
the multifunction/COMAND display.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First of all, familiarise yourself with your
COMAND Online. Read this Supplement, particularly the safety and warning notes, before
you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your COMAND Online and
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your
COMAND Online may differ depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry
variant
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art .
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical
features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre should you have any questions.
The Owner's Manual and all supplements are
integral parts of the vehicle. You should
always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to
the new owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
1725845481Z102 É1725845481Z102dËÍ
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 19
Operating safety ................................. 15
System settings .................................. 43
Vehicle functions ................................ 51
Navigation ........................................... 61
Telephone .......................................... 129
Online and Internet functions .......... 169
Audio .................................................. 207
Video .................................................. 249
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 269
4
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
360° camera
Displaying images ............................ 58
Switching on/off .............................. 58
Access data of the mobile phone
network provider
Deleting ......................................... 178
Editing ........................................... 177
Making entries ............................... 175
Selecting ........................................ 173
Active partition (USB mass storage
devices only)
Selecting ........................................ 224
Address book
Browsing ........................................ 155
Calling up ....................................... 155
Changing an entry .......................... 157
Connecting a call ........................... 158
Creating an entry ........................... 156
Deleting an entry ........................... 156
Deleting contacts ........................... 161
Details about an entry ................... 157
Entering characters ......................... 34
Entry as a home address ............... 107
Hiding contact details .................... 162
Importing contacts ........................ 160
Introduction ................................... 154
Receiving vCards ........................... 161
Searching for an entry ................... 156
Starting route guidance ................. 158
Voice tag ....................................... 159
Address entry menu ............................ 65
Adjusting the balance ......................... 31
Adjusting the bass .............................. 31
Adjusting the brightness (TV, video) 250
Adjusting the colour (TV, video) ...... 250
Adjusting the contrast (TV, video) ... 250
Adjusting the sound settings
Balance ............................................ 31
Treble and bass ............................... 31
Adjusting the treble (sound) .............. 31
Adjusting the volume
COMAND ......................................... 30
Navigation messages ....................... 30
Traffic announcements .................... 30
Alternative route ................................. 97
Audio
Radio mode ................................... 208
Audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode
Switching to (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ................................ 280
Audio DVD
Pause function ............................... 220
Playback options ........................... 225
Safety notes .................................. 214
Setting the audio format ................ 224
Stop function ................................. 220
Switching to ................................... 218
Audio menu (COMAND Online) ......... 208
AUX (audio)
Notes/socket ................................ 247
Switching to ................................... 247
AUX (video)
Connecting an external video
source ............................................ 265
Setting the volume and sound ....... 266
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 266
Switching to ................................... 266
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ............................... 272
Avoiding an area ................................ 120
Back button ......................................... 27
Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 113
Bluetooth®
Activating/deactivating ................... 46
Activating audio mode ................... 238
Conditions (telephone) .................. 132
Connecting another mobile phone . 136
Connecting audio devices .............. 235
Device list ...................................... 235
Entering the passcode ................... 134
External authorisation .................... 135
General information ......................... 46
Interface ........................................ 130
Introduction ................................... 130
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 237
Index
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 133
Settings ........................................... 46
Telephone basic menu ................... 137
Telephony ...................................... 132
Telephony notes ............................ 130
Bluetooth® audio basic display ........ 238
Buttons on the COMAND controller ... 27
Call
Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... 139
Connecting .................................... 140
see Telephone
Call list
Display details ............................... 149
Call lists
Deleting ......................................... 150
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 148
Saving an entry in the address
book .............................................. 149
Category list (music search) ............ 227
CD
Copy protection ............................. 227
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222
General information ....................... 227
Inserting ........................................ 214
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 279
Multisession .................................. 225
Notes on compact discs ................ 227
Pause function ............................... 219
Player/changer operation
(COMAND) ..................................... 214
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 279
Safety notes .................................. 214
Selecting a media type .................. 220
Selecting a track ............................ 221
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) .............................................. 31
Switching to ................................... 218
CD/DVD
Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 216
Ejecting (DVD single drive) ............ 215
Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 215
Inserting (DVD single drive) ........... 215
CD mode
Playback options ........................... 225
Changing direction
Announcement phase ...................... 91
Change of direction phase ............... 91
Preparation phase ............................ 91
Changing the character set ................ 38
Changing the picture format (TV,
video) .................................................. 250
Character
Changing the character set .............. 36
Changing the language .................... 35
Deleting ........................................... 36
Moving the cursor ............................ 36
Switching to letters .......................... 35
Characters
Entering ........................................... 37
Entering (address book, phone
book) ............................................... 34
Entering (navigation) ........................ 36
COMAND controller ............................. 27
COMAND control panel ....................... 25
COMAND display
Cleaning instructions ....................... 24
Setting ............................................. 44
Switching on/off .............................. 24
COMAND Online
Active multicontour seat .................. 54
Basic functions ................................ 29
Calling up drive status regulator
(ABC) ............................................... 54
Display ............................................. 20
Emergency call system displays .... 167
Examples of operation ..................... 27
Importing POIs ............................... 185
Menu overview ................................. 22
Multicontour seat ............................ 54
Seat functions .................................. 54
Settings ......................................... 205
Switching on/off .............................. 29
COMAND Online and Internet
see Online and Internet functions
Compass function ............................. 122
Connecting a USB device ................. 218
Contacts
Deleting ......................................... 161
Importing ....................................... 160
6
Index
Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 227
Country-specific information (navigation) ............................................... 123
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Selecting a station ......................... 210
see Radio
Data carrier
Audio DVD ..................................... 225
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 230
Delete button ....................................... 28
Destination
Assigning a destination to an
address book entry ........................ 109
Destination (navigation)
Displaying information ..................... 98
Entering a destination by address .... 65
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 73
Entering a POI .................................. 78
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 73
Entering using Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 74
Saving ............................................ 108
Selecting from the destination
memory ........................................... 71
Selecting from the list of last destinations ........................................... 72
Selecting storage options .............. 109
Storing after destination entry ....... 108
Storing during route guidance ....... 108
Destination memory (navigation)
Deleting an entry ........................... 110
Entering/saving your home
address ............................................ 69
Previous destinations .................... 111
Dialling a number (telephone) .......... 140
Digital teletext (MHEG-5) .................. 257
Digital TV channels
Programme preview ....................... 254
Disc
CD/DVD ........................................ 227
MP3 ............................................... 225
DISC button
Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3
mode ............................................. 218
Activating Bluetooth® Audio .......... 239
Switching on the Media Interface . . 242
Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER 231
Display
Selecting the design ........................ 44
Displaying the arrival time ................. 98
Displaying the distance to the destination ................................................. 98
Displaying the track and album ....... 224
Dolby® Digital ...................................... 32
DTMF tone transmission .................. 141
DVD
Copy protection ............................. 227
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222
Inserting ........................................ 214
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 279
Notes on discs ............................... 227
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 279
Selecting a media type .................. 220
Selecting a track ............................ 221
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) .............................................. 31
DVD video
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 288
Dynamic route guidance/TMC
Displaying traffic reports ............... 104
Displays on the map ...................... 103
Introduction ................................... 103
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Emergency call 999 or 112 .............. 131
Entering a junction name ................... 69
Entering an address (example) .......... 65
Entering a street name ....................... 66
Entering the house number ................ 66
Entering the town ................................ 66
Entry
Deleting ........................................... 38
Saving .............................................. 35
Index
Example display
Audio CD mode .............................. 219
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 230
Factory setting (reset function) ......... 49
Fast forward
Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 222
Video DVD ..................................... 262
Fast rewind
Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 222
Video DVD ..................................... 262
Favourites (Internet) ......................... 202
Favourites button ................................ 47
Frequency
Adjusting for radio stations ............ 211
Fuel
Displaying consumption ................... 52
Google™ local search
Importing a destination/route ....... 181
Popular searches ........................... 182
Search ........................................... 180
Search history ............................... 182
Selecting a search position ............ 180
Using as the destination ................ 181
GPS reception ...................................... 62
Gracenote® Media Database ............ 222
Hands-free microphone, switching
on/off ................................................. 141
Harman/kardon® Logic 7® surround sound system
see Surround sound (harman/
kardon® surround sound system)
Heading up (navigation) ................... 113
Headphones
Changing batteries ........................ 274
Home address
Entering and saving ......................... 69
Selecting from the destination
memory ........................................... 71
Indicator lamp
Remote control ..............................
Interface (USB, iPod®)
see Media Interface
Internet
Calling up the carousel view ..........
Conditions for access ....................
Creating a favourite .......................
Entering the URL ............................
Favourites manager .......................
Favourites menu ............................
Menu functions ..............................
Opening favourites .........................
Selecting/setting access data .......
Selecting favourites .......................
Internet radio
Calling up .......................................
Searching for stations ....................
iPod®
Alphabetic track selection .............
Connecting to Media Interface ......
Selecting a category/playlist .........
iTunes® ...............................................
274
197
170
202
197
202
203
200
201
171
198
196
196
245
241
244
245
Lane recommendations
Explanation ...................................... 93
Presentation .................................... 93
LINGUATRONIC
Settings ........................................... 46
List of access data
New provider ................................. 175
List of mobile phone network providers
Calling up ....................................... 171
Empty ............................................ 171
With the selected provider ............. 173
Load/eject button ............................. 215
Lumbar support
Adjusting (COMAND Online) ............ 55
8
Index
Map (navigation)
Adjusting the scale ........................
Arrival time/distance to the destination ..........................................
City model .....................................
Geo-coordinate display ..................
Heading .........................................
Information in the display ..............
Map settings ..................................
Moving ...........................................
North orientation ...........................
Notes .............................................
POI symbols ...................................
RDS-TMC displays .........................
Road display ..................................
Saving the crosshair position .........
Showing the map data version .......
Topographical map ........................
Updating ........................................
Updating process ...........................
Media Interface
Alphabetical track selection ..........
Basic menu ....................................
Connecting an external audio
source ............................................
Connecting an external video
source ............................................
Connection options .......................
iPod® .............................................
Mode .............................................
MP3 player ....................................
Notes for the MP3 player ...............
Playback options ...........................
Selecting categories ......................
Selecting folders ............................
Selecting music files ......................
Selecting playlists ..........................
Switching on ..................................
USB mass storage device ..............
Media list ...........................................
Mercedes-Benz Contact ....................
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system
Automatic emergency call .............
Conditions .....................................
Displays in the COMAND display ...
111
114
116
114
113
114
113
112
113
111
113
103
114
112
123
116
124
124
245
242
241
265
240
240
240
241
246
246
244
244
243
244
242
240
220
163
165
165
167
Manual emergency call .................. 166
Overview ........................................ 164
Service availability in Europe ......... 164
Transmitted data ........................... 167
Microphone, switching on/off ......... 141
Mobile phone
Authorising .................................... 134
Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) . 132
De-authorising ............................... 136
External authorisation .................... 135
Registering (authorising) ................ 134
Motorway information ...................... 116
MP3
Bit/sampling rates ......................... 226
Copyright ....................................... 226
Disc ............................................... 225
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222
File systems ................................... 225
Formats ......................................... 226
Notes ............................................. 225
Pause function ............................... 219
Playback options ........................... 225
Safety notes .................................. 214
Selecting a media type .................. 220
Selecting a track ............................ 221
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) .............................................. 31
Switching to ................................... 218
Multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting the volume ....................... 30
Selecting a TV channel .................. 252
Multisession CD ................................ 225
MUSIC REGISTER
Copying music data ....................... 231
Deleting all music files ................... 232
Deleting individual music files ....... 234
General notes ................................ 230
Memory space info ........................ 233
Playback options ........................... 234
Switching on .................................. 230
Music search ..................................... 227
My address ........................................ 106
Index
Navigation
Adjusting the volume of the navigation announcements .................... 30
Alternative route .............................. 97
Avoiding an area ............................ 120
Basic settings .................................. 64
Blocking a route section affected
by a traffic jam ................................. 96
Compass function .......................... 122
Destination memory ...................... 106
Displaying destination information (arrival time, distance to destination) ........................................... 98
Dynamic route guidance/TMC ....... 103
Entering/saving your home
address ............................................ 69
Entering a destination ...................... 65
Entering a destination by address .... 65
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 73
Entering a POI .................................. 78
Entering characters (character bar) . 36
General notes .................................. 62
GPS reception .................................. 62
Important safety notes .................... 62
Lane recommendation ..................... 93
List of areas ................................... 121
Map settings .................................. 111
Motorway information ................... 116
Off-road/off-map (off-road destination) ........................................... 102
Previous destinations .................... 110
Repeating announcements .............. 95
Route guidance ................................ 90
Selecting a destination from the
destination memory ......................... 71
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 72
Selecting your home address ........... 71
Setting options for destination/
route download .............................. 194
Setting route options (avoiding:
motorways, toll roads, tunnels,
ferries) ............................................. 64
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 64
Showing/hiding the menu ............... 63
Starting route calculation ................ 68
Switching announcements on/off . . . 95
Switching on .................................... 63
Navigation announcements
Switching off .................................... 30
Night View Assist Plus
Showing the image on the
COMAND display ............................. 58
North orientation (navigation) ......... 113
Off-map ..............................................
Off-road ..............................................
Online and Internet functions
Ending the connection ...................
Establishing/ending the connection ................................................
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps .........
Manually setting the access data
of the mobile phone network provider ..............................................
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website .....
Options menu ................................
Resetting adjustments ...................
Selecting options for the local
search ............................................
Selecting options for the weather
display ...........................................
Selecting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider .....
Setting options for destination/
route download ..............................
Specifying the ID for the download
102
102
179
178
195
175
195
191
195
191
192
173
194
194
Pause function
Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 219
Video DVD ..................................... 262
Personal POIs
Acoustic notification ........................ 84
Calling up the menu ......................... 83
10
Index
Personal special destination
Selecting as the destination ............. 86
Personal special destinations
Displaying on the map ..................... 83
Managing categories ........................ 84
Saving .............................................. 85
Settings ........................................... 83
Visual information ............................ 83
Phone book
Adding a number to an address
book entry ..................................... 147
Calling up ....................................... 144
Creating a new entry ..................... 147
Deleting an entry ........................... 146
Entering characters ......................... 34
Searching for an entry ................... 145
Symbol overview ............................ 145
Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 250
Picture viewer
Displaying pictures ........................ 267
Introduction ................................... 266
Playback options
Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 225
POI (navigation)
Category .......................................... 80
Defining the position for the POI
search .............................................. 79
Entering ........................................... 78
Entering a POI using the map ........... 82
List ................................................... 80
POI icon
Setting ........................................... 113
POIs (navigation)
see Personal POIs
Previous destinations (navigation) .. 110
Radio
Alphabetical browser ..................... 210
Overview ........................................ 208
RDS (Radio Data System) .............. 212
Setting a station ............................ 210
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) .............................................. 31
Storing stations ............................. 212
Switching on .................................. 208
Switching wavebands .................... 209
Traffic Programme ......................... 213
Radio station
Storing ........................................... 212
RDS (Radio Data System)
General notes ................................ 212
Switching on/off ........................... 213
Read-aloud function
Automatic ...................................... 106
Rear-compartment screens .............. 271
Rear Seat Entertainment
Active COMAND source ................. 292
Adjusting sound settings ............... 276
Adjusting the brightness ................ 277
Adjusting the colour ...................... 277
Adjusting the contrast ................... 277
AUX mode ...................................... 295
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 279
Changing the batteries .................. 274
Changing the picture format .......... 277
Cordless headphones .................... 273
Multiple users ................................ 276
Operating with the headphones ..... 276
Picture settings .............................. 277
System settings ............................. 278
TV mode ........................................ 283
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 276
Video DVD mode ........................... 288
Receiving vCards ............................... 161
Redialling (telephone) ....................... 140
Remote control
Button lighting ............................... 272
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 271
Reset function ..................................... 49
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 49
Reversing camera
Displaying the image ........................ 57
Route
Estimated time of arrival .................. 98
Route (navigation)
Calling up the "Routes" menu ........ 100
Displaying the distance to the destination ............................................ 98
Recording ........................................ 99
Route overview ................................ 98
Selecting an alternative route .......... 97
Index
Setting route options (avoiding:
motorways, toll roads, tunnels,
ferries) ............................................. 64
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 64
Starting calculation .......................... 68
Route display ....................................... 99
Route guidance
Cancel ............................................. 96
Continue .......................................... 96
Destination reached ......................... 96
General information ......................... 90
Lane recommendations ................... 93
Off-road ......................................... 102
Safety notes
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 214
Using the telephone ....................... 130
Video DVD mode ........................... 259
Saving the crosshair position .......... 112
Screen
Selecting for remote operation ...... 271
SD memory card
Ejecting .......................................... 218
Inserting ........................................ 217
Seat
Active multicontour seat .................. 54
Balance (seat heating) ..................... 56
Resetting adjustments ..................... 57
Seat functions (COMAND Online) .... 54
Selecting for adjustment
(COMAND Online) ............................ 54
Seats
Adjusting lumbar support
(COMAND Online) ............................ 55
Multicontour seat ............................ 54
Selecting channels
TV .................................................. 252
Selecting the country .......................... 66
Settings
Basic TV settings ........................... 255
Menu overview ................................. 22
Picture (COMAND) ......................... 250
Sound settings ................................. 31
Setting the audio format
Audio DVD ..................................... 224
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 292
Video DVD ..................................... 264
Setting the date format ...................... 45
Setting the day design ........................ 44
Setting the language
COMAND ......................................... 47
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 292
Setting the night design ..................... 44
Setting the read-aloud speed ............. 46
Setting the reception region (TV)
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 287
Setting the volume
Telephone calls ................................ 30
Video-AUX ..................................... 266
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 29
Sound menu ......................................... 31
Sound Modus ....................................... 33
Sound settings
Calling up the sound menu .............. 31
Surround sound ............................... 32
Special destination list
With character bar ........................... 81
Speed dial list
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list ................................ 150
SPLITVIEW ............................................ 39
Station list ......................................... 210
Station pre-sets ................................. 211
Station search ................................... 211
Stop function
Audio DVD ..................................... 220
Video DVD ..................................... 262
Storing channels
TV .................................................. 254
Storing stations
Radio ............................................. 212
Street View .......................................... 74
Surround sound ................................... 32
Surround sound (harman/kardon® surround sound system)
Notes ............................................... 32
Switching on/off .............................. 32
Switching between summer and
standard time ...................................... 45
11
12
Index
Switching wavelength (radio) .......... 209
System settings
Bluetooth® ....................................... 46
Date ................................................. 44
Language ......................................... 47
LINGUATRONIC (voice control) ........ 46
Text reader speed ............................ 46
Time ................................................. 44
Time zone ........................................ 45
Telephone
Accepting/ending call ................... 139
Accepting or rejecting a waiting
call ................................................. 142
Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30
Automatically reconnecting
mobile phone ................................. 136
Calling (outgoing call) .................... 140
Conference connection .................. 143
Connecting a Mobile phone (general information) ............................ 132
Deregistering (de-authorising) a
mobile phone ................................. 136
Ending an active call ...................... 143
Entering a number ......................... 140
Entering phone numbers ................ 140
External authorisation (Bluetooth®) 135
Function restrictions ...................... 131
General notes ................................ 130
Incoming call ................................. 139
Making a call ................................. 142
Making a call via speed dial ........... 140
Operating options .......................... 131
Overview of functions .................... 141
Reception and transmission volume ............................................... 138
Rejecting a call .............................. 139
Safety notes .................................. 130
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 141
Single call ...................................... 141
Switching hands-free microphone
on/off ............................................ 141
Text message (SMS) ...................... 152
Toggling ......................................... 143
Using the telephone ....................... 139
see Bluetooth®
Telephone basic menu
Bluetooth® interface ...................... 137
Telephone mode
Redialling ....................................... 140
Telephone number
Entering ......................................... 140
Teletext
TV (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 288
Teletext (TV) ...................................... 256
Text message (SMS)
Call sender .................................... 154
Deleting ......................................... 154
Inbox .............................................. 152
Reading .......................................... 153
Reading aloud ................................ 153
Storing sender in address book ..... 154
Storing the sender as a new
address book entry ........................ 154
Text messages (SMS)
Notes and requirements ................ 152
Time
Setting ............................................. 46
Setting summer/standard time ....... 45
Setting the format ............................ 45
Setting the time ............................... 44
Setting the time/date format .......... 45
Setting the time manually ................ 44
Setting the time zone ....................... 45
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
Displays on the map ...................... 103
Switching dynamic route guidance on/off ................................... 103
Tone settings
Balance and fader ............................ 31
Track
Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 221
Selecting using the number keypad 221
Track information .............................. 283
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Interrupting .................................... 213
Notes ............................................. 213
Switching on/off ........................... 213
Traffic jam function ............................. 96
Index
Traffic jam icon
Showing on route ........................... 104
Traffic jam message
Reading out on route ..................... 106
Traffic jams
Showing in the map ....................... 103
Traffic Message Channel
see TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
Traffic messages
see Dynamic route guidance/TMC
Traffic Programme (TA)
Switching off .................................... 30
Traffic reports
Reading out on route ..................... 106
Real-time traffic news .................... 105
Showing in the map ....................... 103
Showing on route ........................... 104
Traffic symbol information ............. 104
Traffic Sign Assist
COMAND display ........................... 118
Display on the map ........................ 119
Switching on/off ........................... 118
Travel guide
Activating/deactivating data ........... 87
Calling up ......................................... 88
Choosing topics ............................... 89
Exploring a destination or route ....... 90
Selecting a destination or route on
the map ........................................... 89
ViaMichelin ...................................... 87
True Image™ ........................................ 33
TV
Alphabetical browser ..................... 254
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 250
Digital teletext (MHEG-5) ............... 257
Fixing a channel ............................. 255
Further options .............................. 258
Information about the current programme ......................................... 254
Picture settings .............................. 250
Programme preview ....................... 254
Reception quality ........................... 251
Selecting channels (COMAND
Online) ........................................... 252
Selecting channels (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 284
Selecting language and subtitles ... 258
Setting the reception region .......... 256
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 252
Showing/hiding the navigation
menu ............................................. 251
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) .............................................. 31
Storing channels (COMAND Online) 254
Storing channels (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 286
Switching on .................................. 251
Teletext .......................................... 256
Updating the digital map .................. 124
USB
see Media Interface
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 16
Video
see Video DVD
Video-AUX
Setting the picture ......................... 250
Video DVD
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 250
Data carrier .................................... 259
DVD menu ..................................... 263
Fast forward/rewind ...................... 262
Function restrictions ...................... 260
Interactive content ........................ 265
Operation ....................................... 259
Pause function ............................... 262
Playing conditions .......................... 260
Safety notes .................................. 259
Selecting ........................................ 263
Selecting a film/title ...................... 263
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 262
Setting the audio format ................ 264
Setting the language ...................... 264
Setting the picture ......................... 250
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 261
Showing/hiding the navigation
menu ............................................. 261
Stop function ................................. 262
Subtitles ........................................ 265
Switching on .................................. 260
13
14
Index
Waypoints
Accepting waypoints for the route ... 77
Creating ........................................... 75
Editing .............................................. 76
Entering ........................................... 75
Searching for a filling station when
the fuel level is low .......................... 77
Weather display (COMAND
Online)
Calling up the weather map ........... 189
Information chart ........................... 186
Selecting locations in the information chart ....................................... 187
Selecting the location .................... 187
Selecting the location in the
weather map .................................. 189
Switching off .................................. 186
Switching on .................................. 186
Weather map (COMAND Online)
Legend ........................................... 190
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 189
Switching to the weather information display .................................... 189
Website
Adding to favourites ....................... 201
Operating safety
Important safety notes
Declarations of conformity
G WARNING
Wireless vehicle components
Operating the integrated information systems
and communications equipment in the vehicle
while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND Online.
COMAND Online calculates the route to the
destination without taking account of the following, for example:
lights
and give way signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
COMAND Online may give incorrect driving
recommendations if the data on the digital
map does not correspond to the actual conditions. For example, a route may have been
diverted or the direction of a one-way street
may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations.
Bear in mind that, at a speed of only
50 km/h, your vehicle covers a distance of
nearly 14 m per second.
The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the COMAND
Online system which receive and/or transmit
radio waves:
The components of this vehicle which receive
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant
with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You
can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version
of Directive ECE-R 10.
Rtraffic
Rstop
Correct use
Observe the following information when using
COMAND Online:
Rthe
safety notes in this manual
rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Rtraffic
i Improper work on electronic components
or other systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer)
and their software may result in malfunction or failure. Even systems that have not
been modified could be affected because
the electronic systems are connected.
Electronic malfunctions can seriously jeopardise the operational safety of your vehicle.
i The functionality of a roof aerial (telephone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carrier
systems are used.
Attaching metallised retrofit film to the
windscreen may affect radio reception and
have a negative impact on all other aerials
15
16
Operating safety
(e.g. emergency aerial) in the vehicle interior.
i Only have work or changes to electronic
components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This workshop should
have the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
i Protection against theft: this device is
equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on
protection against theft can be obtained
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
of an airbag, intervention of stability control
systems.
Renvironmental conditions. This includes,
e.g. the outside temperature.
This data is exclusively technical in nature
and is used to:
Rassist
in the detection and rectification of
faults and defects
Roptimise vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements over distances travelled.
When your vehicle is serviced, this technical
information can be read out from the event
and fault memory.
Services include:
Rrepairs
Rservice
Data stored in the vehicle
A number of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about:
Rthe
vehicle's operating state
Revents
Rfaults
This technical information generally documents the condition of a component, a module, a system or an environment.
These are, for example:
Roperating
conditions of system components. This includes, e.g. fluid levels.
Rstatus messages from the vehicle and from
individual vehicle components. This
includes, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration.
Rmalfunctions and faults in important system components. This includes, e.g. lights,
brakes.
Rreactions of the vehicle in special driving
situations. This includes, e.g. deployment
processes
claims
Rquality assurance
The information is read out by authorised
employees of the service network (including
manufacturers) using special diagnostic devices. You can find more information there if
necessary.
After a fault has been rectified, the information in the fault memory is deleted or consecutively overwritten.
In normal vehicle operation, situations may
arise in which this technical data could
become personal in nature in conjunction
with other information and, if necessary, on
consultation of an approval official.
Examples include:
Rwarranty
Raccident
reports
damage
Rwitness testimonies
Further additional features which are contractually agreed with the customer likewise
allow specific vehicle data to be obtained
from the vehicle. Such additional features
include vehicle locating in an emergency, for
example.
Rvehicle
Operating safety
Qualified specialist workshop
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
Copyright information
General notes
You can find information on licences for free
and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components on the following website: http://www.mercedesbenz.com/opensource.
Features of your COMAND Online
These operating instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND Online system at the time
of purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. This is
also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on
your COMAND Online system may differ from
that in the descriptions and illustrations.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some COMAND functions
are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle
is in motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or COMAND Online will
display a message to this effect.
17
18
Features of your COMAND Online .....
COMAND Online operating system . . .
Operating COMAND Online ................
Basic functions of COMAND Online ...
Character entry (telephony) ...............
Character entry (navigation) ..............
SPLITVIEW ...........................................
20
20
28
29
34
36
39
At a glance
19
20
COMAND Online operating system
At a glance
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
You can call up the main functions:
Rusing
the corresponding function buttons
Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND
display
the remote control
Rusing
COMAND display
General notes
COMAND Online operating system
Overview
! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could
damage the display or impair its function.
Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface
may result in impairments to the display,
which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair
your ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperaturecontrolled switch-off feature. The brightness
is automatically reduced if the temperature is
too high. If necessary, the display may temporarily switch off completely.
: COMAND display (Y page 20)
; COMAND control panel with a single DVD
drive or DVD changer
= COMAND controller (Y page 27)
You can use COMAND Online to operate the
following main functions:
Rthe
navigation system
audio function
Rthe telephone function
Rthe video function
Rthe system settings
Ronline and Internet functions
Rthe Digital Owner's Manual
(availability depends on the vehicle model)
Rthe
COMAND Online operating system
21
At a glance
Display overview
Example display for radio
: Status bar
; To call up the audio menu
= Main function bar
? Display/selection window
A Radio menu bar
Status bar : shows the time, the active network provider and the signal strength.
If the traffic announcement function is switched on, the . symbol appears and when the
sound is switched off, the , symbol is displayed.
The main functions – navigation, audio, telephone and video – feature additional menus. This
is indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items.
Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main function
is activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering.
In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selection window ? is active.
Menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions.
22
COMAND Online operating system
At a glance
Menu overview
Navi
Audio
Telephone
Video
System
Route settings
Radio
Telephone
TV
Calls up the Calls up the
system
Digital Ownmenu
er's Manual
(availability
depends on
the vehicle
model)
Map settings
Disc
Address
book
DVD video
Calls up
COMAND
Online and
Internet
Personal POIs
Memory
card
Aux
Calls up the
MercedesBenz Mobile
website
Travel guide
MUSIC
REGISTER
Messages
(street name
announcements,
acoustic information during calls,
audio fadeout,
reserve fuel level)
USB memory
O Activates/
deactivates alternative routes
Media Interface
Avoids an area
Bluetooth
audio
Shows the map ver- Aux
sion
Symbol ®
COMAND Online operating system
23
System
Time
SplitView
Consumption
Seat
Display off
Display settings
Switches
the automatic time
settings
on/off
Operates
COMAND
functions
from the
passenger
side
Calls up the
fuel consumption
display
Changes
the driver/
frontpassenger
seat settings
Switches
off the display
Sets the text
reader speed
Sets the
time zone
LINGUATRONIC
settings
Switches to
summer
time
Reversing camera
Manual
time setting
Sets the language
Sets the
time/date
format
Favourites button
O Activates/
deactivates Bluetooth®
Automatic volume
adjustment
Imports/exports
data
Resets COMAND
Online
If equipped with the reversing camera: when the function is activated and COMAND Online
is switched on, the image from the reversing camera is automatically shown in the COMAND
display when reverse gear is engaged.
i If the 360° camera menu item is displayed, Display off can be called up under System.
At a glance
System menu overview
COMAND Online operating system
24
At a glance
Switching the COMAND display on/off
Press the W function button.
or
Select System in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
In both cases, the system menu appears.
To switch off: select Display off and
press W to confirm.
X To switch on: press one of the function
buttons, e.g. W, Ø or the % back
button.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the COMAND display. The
display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you
have to clean the screen, however, use a
mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free
cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a
commercially available microfibre cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage. Then dry the surface with a dry
microfibre cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. These could damage the
display surface.
COMAND Online operating system
25
At a glance
COMAND control panel
Function
Switches to radio mode
Switches wavebands
Switches to DAB radio
mode
Switches to navigation
mode
Shows the menu system
Press h repeatedly
• Switches to the audio CD,
audio DVD and MP3 mode
• Switches to memory card
mode
• Switches to MUSIC REGISTER
• Switches to USB storage
device mode
• Switches to Media Interface or audio AUX mode
• Switches to Bluetooth®
audio mode
Function
Page
208
209
208
63
63
218
218
230
218
242
238
Calls up the telephone
basic menu:
• Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
SAP telephony; see the separate operating instructions
Load/eject button
8 Single DVD drive
V DVD changer
Selects a station using the
station list (FM and DAB
radio mode)
Sets a station using the station search function
Rewinds
Selects the previous track
Disc slot
• Loads CDs/DVDs
• Ejects CDs/DVDs
• Updates the digital map
Page
137
215
215
210
211
222
221
215
216
124
26
COMAND Online operating system
At a glance
Function
Selects a station using the
station list (FM and DAB
radio mode)
Sets a station using the station search function
Fast forward
Selects the next track
Delete button:
• Deletes characters
• Deletes an entry
Number keypad
• Selects stations via the
station presets
• Stores stations manually
• Authorises mobile phone
• Telephone number entry
• Sends DTMF tones
• Character entry
• Selects a location for the
weather forecast from the
memory
z Displays the current
track being played
g Selects stations by
entering the frequency
manually
g Selects a track
Page
Function
210
211
222
221
SD memory card slot
Calls up the system menu
Accepts a call
Dials a number
Redials
Accepts a waiting call
Mute
Switches the hands-free
microphone on/off
Cancels the text message
read-aloud function
Switches off the traffic and
navigation announcements
38
38
211
212
134
140
141
37
187
224
211
221
Switches COMAND Online
on/off
Adjusts the volume
Rejects a call
Ends an active call
Rejects a waiting call
Page
29
30
217
44
139
140
140
142
29
141
153
29
139
143
142
COMAND Online operating system
Overview
Example of operation
In the instructions, operating sequences are
described as follows:
Press the $ button.
Radio mode is activated.
X Select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Station list by pressing W.
The station list appears.
: COMAND controller
You can use the COMAND controller to select
the menu items in the COMAND display.
You can:
Buttons on the COMAND controller
Overview
Rcall
up menus or lists
within menus or lists and
Rexit menus or lists
Rscroll
Operation
: Back button (Y page 27)
; Delete button: (Y page 28)
= Seat function button (Y page 54)
? Favourites button (Y page 47)
i If your vehicle does not have the seat
Example: operating the COMAND controller
The COMAND controller can be:
Rpressed
briefly or pressed and held W
Rturned clockwise or anti-clockwise cVd
Rslid left or right XVY
Rslid forwards or back ZVÆ
Rslid diagonally aVb
function button, it will have two Favourites
buttons.
i For AMG vehicles: the COMAND Controller is configured with the : and ; buttons.
Back button
You can use the % back button to exit a
menu or to call up the basic display of the
current operating mode.
At a glance
COMAND controller
27
Operating COMAND Online
28
At a glance
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
back button.
COMAND Online changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X To call up the basic display: press and
hold the % back button.
COMAND Online changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.
Operating COMAND Online
Selecting a main function
Delete button:
To delete individual characters: briefly
press the j delete button.
X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
CLR button j.
Seat function button
You can use button T to call up the following seat functions:
Rmulticontour
seat (with 4-way lumbar sup-
port)
Ractive multicontour seat (dynamic seat and
massage function)
(seat heating distribution)
More information on the seat functions
(Y page 54).
Rbalance
Favourites button
You can assign predefined functions to the
favourites button ; and call them up by
pressing the button (Y page 47).
Address entry menu
: Main function bar
Situation: switching from navigation mode
(address entry menu) to the system settings.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Destination by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Address entry and press W to
confirm.
The address entry menu appears.
Slide ZV the COMAND controller and
switch to main function bar :.
X Select System in the main function bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The system menu appears.
Basic functions of COMAND Online
Selects a menu item
At a glance
Selecting the menu of a main function
29
Select the station by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The station is set.
Basic functions of COMAND Online
Switches COMAND Online on/off
Example display for audio CD mode and audio
menu (below)
: To call up the audio menu
If one of the navigation, audio, telephone or
video main functions is switched on, triangle : appears next to the entry in the main
function bar. You can now select an associated menu.
The example shows how to call up the audio
menu from audio CD mode (an audio CD is
playing).
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Audio menu appears.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
audio mode.
Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Radio mode is activated.
Press the q control knob.
When you switch on COMAND Online, a
warning message will appear.
COMAND Online calls up the previously
selected menu.
If you switch off COMAND Online, playback
of the current audio or video source will
also be switched off.
Mute
Audio/video source sound
Press the 8 button on the COMAND
controller or the multifunction steering
wheel.
The sound from the respective audio or
video source is switched on or muted.
i When the sound is switched off, you will
see the , symbol in the status bar. If you
change the audio or video source or change
the volume, the sound is automatically
switched on.
Basic functions of COMAND Online
30
At a glance
i Even if the sound is switched off, you will
still hear traffic and navigation system
announcements.
Switching Traffic Programme and navigation announcements on again
To switch Traffic Programme off: press
and hold the 8 button until the . display disappears from the status bar of the
display.
A confirmation tone sounds.
X To switch the Traffic Programme on
again: press and hold down the 8 button until the . display in the status bar
appears.
A confirmation tone sounds.
To switch navigation announcements
off: press and hold the 8 button during
an announcement.
To switch navigation announcements
on again: switch COMAND Online off and
then on again (Y page 29).
or
Start a new route calculation
(Y page 68).
or
To have the announcement repeated while
the navigation menu is shown, select +
and press W to confirm (Y page 95).
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting the volume for the audio or
video source
Turn the q control knob
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The volume of the currently selected audio
or video source changes.
You can also adjust the volume for the following:
Rtraffic
announcements
announcements
Rphone calls
RLINGUATRONIC voice control (see the separate operating instructions)
Rnavigation
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation
announcements
You can adjust the volume of traffic and navigation announcements independently, relative to the volume of the audio or video
source.
During traffic or navigation announcements:
Turn the q control knob.
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
Turn the q control knob.
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the sound settings
Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The setting is saved.
Calling up the sound menu
Setting balance and fader
You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. This means
that it is possible to set more bass for radio
mode than for audio CD mode, for example.
You can call up the respective sound menu
from the menu of the desired mode.
The example describes how to call up the
sound menu in radio mode.
X Press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
selected.
Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You can now set the treble, bass and balance for radio mode.
Setting treble and bass
Setting the balance
The balance function is used to control
whether the sound is louder on the driver's or
on the front-passenger side.
The fader function is used to control whether
the sound is louder in the front or in the rear
of the vehicle.
You can adjust the fader depending on the
vehicle model.
Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound system: for the best sound focus, choose the
setting 0.
X Select Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in the
sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
To set the bass
Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
31
At a glance
Basic functions of COMAND Online
32
Basic functions of COMAND Online
At a glance
Surround sound
General notes
Your vehicle is equipped with one of two
sound systems:
Rharman/kardon®Logic7® Surround Sound
system
The harman/kardon®Logic 7® Surround
Sound system allows you to set the optimum surround sound in the vehicle interior
(Y page 32).
RBang & Olufsen sound system
(Y page 33)
Both sound systems are available for the following operating modes:
Rradio
(FM only)
radio
Raudio CD
Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digital audio formats)
RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB
storage device)
RMedia Interface
Roperation with Bluetooth® audio
RTV
Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital
audio formats)
RAUX
Because many DVDs contain both stereo and
multichannel audio formats, it may be necessary to set the audio format (Y page 264).
Discs which support the audio formats mentioned have the following logos:
harman/kardon®Logic 7® Surround
Sound system
RDAB
The example describes how to set the surround sound for radio mode.
To switch surround sound on/off: press
the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
selected.
X
i If you select Logic7® off, the sound sys-
tem plays the tracks as stored on the
medium. Due to the design of the
passenger compartment, an optimum
audio experience cannot be guaranteed for
all passengers.
Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Surround and press W to confirm.
Select Logic7® on or Logic7® off by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Depending on your selection, surround
sound is switched on or off and the menu
is exited.
X To exit the menu without saving: press
the % back button or slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: for the optimum audio experience for all passengers
when Logic7® is switched on, the balance
should be set to the centre of the vehicle
interior.
You will achieve the best sound results by
playing high-quality audio and video DVDs.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s.
Surround-sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as the
medium wave range (MW) in radio mode.
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,
you should switch off Logic 7®, as it may
otherwise switch between stereo and
mono and cause temporary sound distortions.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback.
i The Logic7® on function creates a surround sound experience for every
passenger when playing stereo recordings,
for example. It enables optimum playback
of music and films on CD, audio DVD or
video DVD with multichannel audio formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.
This results in sound characteristics as the
sound engineer intended when the original
was recorded.
Bang & Olufsen sound system
You can optimise the sound in the vehicle with
the Bang & Olufsen sound system and the
True Image™ sound technology. The Sound
Mode function enables you to focus the selected sound setting within the vehicle.
The example describes how to set the optimum sound for radio mode.
Selecting the sound setting for True
Image™
Press a number key, such as $.
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. A # dot marks the current
setting for True Image™.
Select Reference or Surround and press
W to confirm.
RReference
This setting provides a crisp, clear, luxury
high-end sound setting for a studio atmosphere in your vehicle.
RSurround
33
At a glance
Basic functions of COMAND Online
Character entry (telephony)
34
At a glance
This setting enables a wide-ranging sound
experience for playing music and videos.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
224 kbit/s.
When playing back music from an iPod®,
the bit rate should also be at least
224 kbit/s.
For optimum playback quality:
: Current position of the sound setting
For the optimum musical enjoyment, you can
focus the sound image precisely on one seat.
This means you are right at the centre of the
listening experience, with all system parameters being precisely calculated for the selected position. The result is authentic music
reproduction inside the vehicle.
Focusing the sound setting
Deactivate the "EQ" setting on the
iPod®.
Surround-sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as the
medium wave range in radio mode.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback.
Character entry (telephony)
Example: entering characters
Press the $ button.
Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. A # dot marks the current
setting for Sound Mode.
:* To switch the character bar to upper-
case/lower-case letters
Depending on the vehicle model series
Select left, all or rear and press W to
confirm.
or
Select left, all or right and press W to
confirm.
To exit the menu: press the % back
button or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: you will achieve
the best sound results on your Bang & Olufsen sound system by playing high-quality
audio DVDs and CDs.
;p To switch the character bar from
upper/lower-case letters to digits
=B To change the language of the char?F
acter bar
To delete a character/entry
The example describes how to enter the surname "Schulz".
X Call up the input menu with data fields
(Y page 147).
X Select S and confirm W with the COMAND
controller.
S appears in the data field.
Character entry (telephony)
Select c and confirm W with the COMAND
controller.
The letter c is added to S in the data field.
X Repeat the process until the name has
been entered in full.
Other input menu functions:
a character/entry (Y page 36)
between upper/lower-case letters (Y page 35)
RChanging the character set (Y page 36)
RMoving the cursor to the next data field
(Y page 36)
X To enter a phone number: select the digits one by one in the corresponding data
field by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Option 2
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and
press W to confirm.
RDeleting
RSwitching
Switching data fields
Storing an entry
After making an entry in the input
menu, to create a new entry, for example (Y page 147): select the ¬ symbol
in the character bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Further functions available in the
character bar
Changing the language of the character
bar
: Cursor in the next data field
; Stores an entry
= 4 and 5 symbols to select a data field
In the input menu, if you want to enter a first
name after you have entered a surname, for
example, proceed as follows to switch
between the data fields:
Option 1
Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and
press W to confirm.
The input menu shows the data field selected.
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 147):
X Select B and press W to confirm.
Select the language by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching the character bar to letters
While making an entry in the input menu, to
create a new entry, for example
(Y page 147):
At a glance
35
Character entry (navigation)
36
At a glance
Select the * (upper case) or E
(lower case) symbol and press W to confirm.
Changing the character set
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 147):
X Select the p symbol and press W to
confirm.
RABC (upper/lower case)
R123 (digits)
ROther (special characters such as @, €,
etc.)
Select the F symbol by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
or
Press the j button next to the
COMAND controller.
To delete an entry: press and hold the
$ button on the control panel until the
entire entry has been deleted.
or
Select the F symbol and press and hold
W the COMAND controller until the entire
entry has been deleted.
or
Moving the cursor to the next data field
Press and hold the j button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted.
Character entry (navigation)
General notes
: Cursor (repositioned)
; 2 and 3 symbol to reposition the cur-
sor
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 147):
X Select the 2 or 3 symbol and press W
to confirm.
Deleting a character/entry
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 147):
X To delete characters: press the $ button on the control panel.
or
The following paragraphs describe how to
enter characters using town input for BER‐
LIN as an example.
If you want to use the address entry menu to
enter a town, a street or a house number, for
example, COMAND Online offers you:
Ra
list with a character bar (option 1)
selection list (option 2)
You can enter the characters using either the
character bar or the number keypad. In the
selection list, you select an entry to copy it to
the address entry menu.
Ra
Character entry (navigation)
Entering characters using the character
bar
Select B by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
List H shows all available town names
beginning with a B. List entry most closely
resembling current entry by user = is
always highlighted at the top of the list
(BAABE in the example).
All of the characters that have been
entered so far are shown in black (letter
B: in the example). Letters added by
COMAND Online are shown in grey ;
(AABE in the example).
Character bar E shows the letters still
available for selection in black D. These
can be selected. In the example, the letter
A is highlighted G. The characters available depend on the entry made by the user
so far and the data contained in the digital
map. Characters that are no longer available are shown in grey C.
Select E, R, L, I, N in succession, confirming
each by pressing W.
Town list with character bar
Call up the town list with the character bar
(Y page 66).
The alphabetically sorted town list shows
the first available entries.
: Character entered by the user B
; Characters automatically added by
COMAND Online AABE
= List entry that most closely resembles the
current entry by the user
? To switch to the selection list
A To delete an entry
B To change the character set (Latin/Cyril-
lic)
C Characters not currently available
D Characters currently available
E Character bar
F To cancel an entry
G Currently selected character
H List
At a glance
Option 1: list of towns/streets with
character bar
37
Character entry (navigation)
38
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
At a glance
To delete an entry: press $ on the
control panel.
or
Press and hold the j button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted.
or
Entering characters using the number
keypad
To enter the letter B: press the l number key twice in quick succession.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display when the key is pressed. The first
available letter is highlighted.
You see which characters you can enter
with that key. Each time the key is pressed,
the next character is selected.
Example: key l:
Rpress
once = A
Rpress twice = B
Rpress three times = C
Wait until the character display goes out.
The entries matching your input are shown
in the list.
Enter E, R, L, I, N using the corresponding
keys.
Further functions in the list with character bar
To delete characters: press the $ button on the control panel.
Select the F symbol in the character bar
and press and hold W the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted.
To switch the character set: select
B and press W to confirm.
This will switch the character set from Latin
to Cyrillic and back.
To cancel an entry: select the & symbol
in the bottom left of the character bar and
press W to confirm.
or
Press the % back button.
The address entry menu appears.
To accept the first list entry: press and
hold W the COMAND controller until the
address entry menu appears.
The accepted list entry is shown there.
Calling up the list as a selection list
It is also possible to switch from the town list
with character bar to the town selection list
at any time during character input.
or
Press the j button next to the
COMAND controller.
or
Select the F symbol in the character bar
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the town list appears as a selection list.
Select the desired town from the selection
list.
or
Select¬in the character bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
SPLITVIEW
Press W the COMAND controller.
Option 2: town list as selection list
COMAND Online either shows the selection
list automatically or you can call up the selection list from the list with the character bar.
The example shows the selection list after the
town BERLIN has been entered. The entry is
highlighted automatically.
X Confirm BERLING by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
You see the available entries.
Confirm BERLIN(1XXXX) by pressing W
the COMAND controller.
The address entry menu appears.
Observe the information relating to destination entry (Y page 65).
SPLITVIEW
Method of operation
SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use
different COMAND functions on the frontpassenger side and on the driver's side. Different content is seen depending on your perspective when viewing the display.
The "Navi" function, for example, can be used
from the driver's side while a video is watched
from the front-passenger side.
SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote control from the front-passenger side.
To do so, use the special radio headphones.
Using the headphones on the correct sides
ensures an optimal sound.
You can connect your own headphones to a
special headphones jack. You can use the
remote control to operate them.
Points to remember
RYou
can only adjust the volume for the
headphones supplied directly on the headphones.
ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio,
TV, video and Internet, for example, may be
used with SPLITVIEW.
RYou can only operate media from the driver's and front-passenger sides separately if
the media are from different sources.
Example: if a medium from the DVD
changer is being played on the driver's side.
Then, no other medium can be used separately on the front-passenger side that is
also played from the DVD changer. However, other media can be used at the same
time on the front-passenger side, including
radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER,
Media Interface, USB or AUX.
RIf you use the same medium on both sides,
you can both carry out the respective settings.
RInternet use is only available at any one
time to the driver or the front passenger.
At a glance
If there are several entries for a town or if
several towns of the same name are stored,
then ¬ is highlighted in the character bar.
39
SPLITVIEW
At a glance
40
A corresponding message appears on the
display.
RInternet can only be used, if it is set and
connected via a telephone on the driver's
side.
RThe multifunction steering wheel can only
be used for functions which relate to the
driver's side.
Switching SPLITVIEW on/off
set on the remote control thumbwheel
(Y page 271).
The SPLITVIEW display remains on for approximately 30 minutes after the key has been
turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. After
this time or after the key has been removed,
the settings on the front-passenger side are
saved for approximately 30 minutes longer.
After this period, reactivation on the frontpassenger side means that the settings from
the driver's side will be used.
Transferring the driver's website
Switching on SPLITVIEW
Select System in the main function bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off.
The front passenger sees the display of the
function last activated. If the switch-on
time was longer than 30 minutes previously, the display from the driver's side is
shown.
Switching off SPLITVIEW
Select ; in the menu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : disappears from the
display. Display ; switches to on.
i If COMAND Online has already been
switched on, you can also use the remote
control to switch SPLITVIEW on and off.
Make sure that the SPLITVIEW symbol is
To switch on SPLITVIEW: select System
from the main function bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off.
X Select ® in the main function bar with the
remote control.
A carousel view appears with the following
options:
ROwner's
Manual
a URL
RInternet favourites
RMercedes-Benz Apps
RInternet radio
REnter
RMercedes
RTransfer
Mobile website
driver's website
X Select Transfer driver's website with
the remote control.
You see the last website called up by the
driver.
Transferring a destination to the
driver
Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination
from the front-passenger side and transfer
this to the driver's side.
X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select System
from the main function bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off.
X Select ® in the main function bar with the
remote control.
The carousel view appears.
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps with the
remote control.
You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz
Apps.
X Select Google Local Search with the
remote control.
Using a menu you can select a category for
the destination.
X Select At current location, for example.
Using a menu you can determine the type
of search enquiry.
X Select Enter search term, for example.
An input field appears.
X Enter the destination with the remote control and confirm the entry with b.
You see the results list from Google.
X Select the exact destination with the
remote control.
An additional menu appears.
Select Navigate to.
A pop-up window appears on the driver's
side with the message: Should the nav‐
igation data from Mercedes-Benz
Apps be accepted?
41
At a glance
SPLITVIEW
42
Features of your COMAND Online .....
Display settings ..................................
Time settings .......................................
Text reader settings ............................
LINGUATRONIC settings .....................
44
44
44
46
46
Bluetooth® settings ............................
Setting the system language .............
Assigning a favourites button ............
Importing/exporting data ..................
Reset function .....................................
46
47
47
48
49
System settings
43
Time settings
44
System settings
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light
sensor affects the setting options for this
function.
design by manually selecting day or night
design, or opt for an automatic setting.
X Press W.
X Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display and press W to confirm.
X Select Day design, Night design or
Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A dot indicates the current setting.
Design
Explanation
Day design
The display is set permanently to day design.
Night design
The display is set permanently to night design.
Automatic
If the Automatic setting
is selected, COMAND
Online evaluates the
readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and automatically
switches between the
display designs.
Press W.
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display and press W to confirm.
X Select Brightness and press W to confirm.
X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Display design
Your COMAND Online display features optimised designs for operation during daytime
and night-time hours. You can customise the
Time settings
General notes
If COMAND Online is equipped with a navigation system and has GPS reception, COMAND
Online automatically sets the time and date.
You can change the time in minute increments. The date can also be changed.
i If you adjust the time in minute increments, any time zone settings and settings
for changing between summer and standard time are lost. Switching between summer and standard time (Y page 45).
Time settings
require the time, time zone and summer/
standard time to be set correctly in order
to work properly:
Rroute
guidance on routes with timedependent traffic guidance
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival
i Use this function to set the time for all
displays in the vehicle.
Setting the time/date format
Press the W button.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Format and press W to confirm.
The # symbols show the current settings.
Set the format by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Abbreviation
Meaning
DD . MM . YY
Day . Month . Year
(date format, two digits)
MM / DD / YYYY
Month/Day/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
YY / MM / DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year (two
digits)
HH : MM (24
hrs)
Hours : Minutes
(24 hour time format)
HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes
(AM/PM time format)
Adjusting the time zone and switching
to summer time
Press W.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Time zone and press W to confirm.
A list of countries or time zones appears.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the country or time zone by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
X Select the time zone and press W to confirm.
The entry for the Automatic time set‐
tings is accepted.
Subsequent operation depends on whether
the automatic changeover function to summer time is available.
X To change manually: select ON or OFF and
press W to confirm.
To change to automatic time: select
Automatic and press W to confirm.
The entry for the Automatic time set‐
tings is accepted.
To switch the automatic time setting
off/on: press the W button.
X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Press W to confirm the Automatic time
settings.
Switch the automatic time setting off ª or
on again O.
To switch on: the menu item is switched
on as the default setting. If the Automatic
time settings is switched off and you
switch it on again, the last settings for the
time zone and summer time changeover
are selected.
To switch off: the time zone is deselected
and the summer time is switched off. If
Automatic is set for the summer time
changeover, a prompt will appear asking
whether this should be maintained.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
System settings
i The following navigation system functions
45
Bluetooth® settings
46
System settings
Setting the time manually
Press W.
X Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm.
Select Help window and press W to confirm.
You have switched the help window on
O or off ª.
Press the W button.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Set time manually and press W
to confirm.
X Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The time is accepted.
Text reader settings
Press the W button.
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Text reader speed and press W
to confirm.
A list appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
LINGUATRONIC settings
Opening/closing the help window
The help window provides information in addition to the audible instructions during individualisation and during the subsequent voice
control.
Individualisation
Using individualisation, you can fine-tune LINGUATRONIC to your own voice and thus
improve voice recognition. See the separate
operating instructions.
Bluetooth® settings
General information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for
short-range wireless data transmissions up to
approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth® allows,
for example, the exchange of vCards.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Press the W button.
The system menu appears.
Assigning a favourites button
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Activate Bluetooth and press
W to confirm.
This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª.
Setting the system language
This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language
affects the characters available for entry.
The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in
English.
If you change the system language, the language for LINGUATRONIC will be also be
changed. If the selected language is not supported by LINGUATRONIC, English will be
selected.
X Press the W button.
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Language and press W to confirm.
The list of languages appears. The # dot
indicates the current setting.
Select the language by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND loads the selected language and
sets it.
i If you are using Arabic map data, the text
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do this, select Eng‐
lish (Arabic map) as the language from
the list of languages. Navigation announcements are then made in Arabic.
Assigning a favourites button
To assign a favourites button: press the
W button.
X Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign as favourite and press
W to confirm.
The list of predefined functions appears.
The dot # indicates the currently selected
function.
X Select the function by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The favourites button is assigned the selected function.
X Example: to call up a favourite: press the
g favourites button.
This calls up the predefined function.
You can select the following predefined functions in a menu:
RSplitView
on/off: you can switch the
screen view for the front passenger on or
off.
RDisplay off/on: you can switch the display off or on.
RFull screen: 'Clock': you can call up
the full screen with the clock.
R®Menu: you can call up the COMAND
Online and Internet functions.
RFull screen: 'Map': you can call up the
full screen with the map.
RSpoken driving tip: you can call up the
current driving recommendation.
RDisplay traffic messages: you can call
up traffic reports.
RNavigate to 'Home address': you can
start route guidance to your home address
if you have already entered and saved the
address (Y page 69).
RDetour menu: you can call up the Detour
menu and then block a section of the route
and recalculate the route (Y page 96).
System settings
47
48
Importing/exporting data
System settings
RCompass
screen: you can call up the compass.
RDriver’s seat massage, Front-pas‐
senger's seat massage or Massage:
both front seats: you can start the massage function, depending on which seats
are selected (Y page 54).
Importing/exporting data
General notes
! When data is being copied to the USB
stick or the memory card, the stick or the
card must not be removed under any circumstances. Doing so runs the risk of data
loss.
Press the W button.
The system menu appears.
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Import/export data and press
W to confirm.
X Select Activate PIN protection and
press W to confirm.
Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protection. When activating PIN protection, you
will be prompted to enter a PIN.
Using this function, you can:
Rtransfer
your personal COMAND data from
one system/vehicle to another
Rmake a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import
data).
Rprotect your data from unwanted export by
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactivated ª).
You can either use an SD memory card or a
USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection
Enter a 4-digit PIN, select¬and press
W to confirm.
You will be prompted to enter the PIN
again.
X Re-enter the PIN, select ¬ and press
W to confirm.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
data from unwanted export.
i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If
you have forgotten your PIN, a MercedesBenz service station can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you
can deactivate PIN protection by resetting
your personal COMAND data
(Y page 49).
Reset function
49
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export data.
X Enter the PIN, select¬and press W to
confirm.
You can now proceed in the same way as if
PIN protection was deactivated.
X To select a preset: select Memory card or
USB storage and press W to confirm.
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
Select All data and press W to confirm.
This function exports all the data to the
selected disc.
or
Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory
stick) (Y page 218).
X Press the W button.
The system menu appears.
Select the data type and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous entry, select the
data type for the export O or not ª.
Select Continue and press W to confirm.
i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGIS-
or
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
TER cannot be saved and imported again
using this function.
Select Import/export data and press
W to confirm.
X Select Import data or Export data and
press W to confirm.
Reset function
You can completely reset COMAND Online to
the factory settings. Amongst other things,
this will delete all personal COMAND Online
data. This includes the station presets,
entries in the destination memory and in the
list of previous destinations in the navigation
system and address book entries. In addition,
an activated PIN protection, which you have
used to protect your data against unwanted
export, will be deactivated. Resetting is rec-
System settings
Importing/exporting data
Reset function
System settings
50
ommended before handing over or selling the
vehicle, for example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.
You can also delete music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music
files" function (Y page 232).
X Press the W function button.
Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A warning message appears asking
whether you wish to reset.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
If you select Yes, a prompt will appear again
asking whether you really wish to reset to
the factory settings.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a message will be shown.
COMAND Online is reset and restarted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
51
52
52
52
53
53
54
57
58
58
Vehicle functions
Features of your COMAND Online .....
Climate control status display ...........
Fuel consumption indicator ...............
ON&OFFROAD display .........................
Driving conditions menu (Active
Body Control) .......................................
Seat functions .....................................
Reversing camera ...............................
Night View Assist Plus .......................
360° camera .......................................
Fuel consumption indicator
52
Vehicle functions
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Climate control status display
á Switches the ZONE function on/off
à Controls the air conditioning automatically
ñ Sets the climate control style in automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE)
_ Sets the air distribution
M, P or O Sets the air distribution
¬ Turns on the defrost function
i How the climate status display is called
up, depends on the climate control system
in your vehicle.
Example settings for the defrost function (top) and
for the climate mode in automatic mode
Example: the climate control status display in the
COMAND display
If you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display
appears for three seconds at the bottom of
the screen in the COMAND display. You will
see the current settings of the various climate
control functions.
Overview of climate control systems, see separate vehicle operating instructions.
The climate control status display appears
when:
You turn the temperature control and set
the temperature
or
You turn the control to set the airflow.
or
You press one of the following buttons:
K Increases air flow
I Decreases air flow
¿ Switches climate control on/off
To hide the display: turn or press the
COMAND controller.
or
Press one of the buttons on
COMAND Online.
Fuel consumption indicator
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
installed engine variant, fuel consumption
can be displayed in the COMAND display.
If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and the
installed engine variant supports it, you can
call up other displays (see the separate operating instructions).
Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control)
Calling up/exiting the display
53
ON&OFFROAD display
Overview
Rvehicle's
angle of inclination
or downhill gradient in percentage
Rsteering angle
Further information on the ON&OFFROAD
functions can be found in the vehicle Owner's
Manual.
Ruphill
To call up the full-screen display: press
the W button.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the Full
screen option is selected.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The system display is shown as full screen
(without system menu).
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the fuel consumption indicator
appears.
The COMAND display shows the fuel consumption for the last 15 minutes of the
journey.
X To exit the full-screen display: press W
the COMAND controller.
The system menu appears.
Every bar of the graph displays the average
value for one minute.
The fuel consumption display may differ from
the display in the FROM START trip computer
in the Trip menu; see the vehicle Owner's
Manual.
Calling up displays
Press W.
In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the display/
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
the ON&OFFROAD display appears.
The COMAND display shows the settings
and the status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.
Exiting the display
Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
the desired display (clock or fuel consumption) is shown.
Driving conditions menu (Active Body
Control)
General notes
On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC),
you can display some driving systems and
additional information in the COMAND display.
Vehicle functions
Depending on the vehicle model series, the
settings and the status of the ON&OFFROAD
functions can be shown in the COMAND display, e.g.
Seat functions
54
Calling up drive status regulator (ABC)
Press W.
In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the display/
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the drive status regulator (ABC)
appears.
The corresponding displays appear in the
COMAND display.
Details on the displays:
The massage function cannot be started or
stopped using the memory button.
Vehicle functions
vehicles except AMG vehicles; see the
separate vehicle Owner's Manual
Rfor AMG vehicles; see the separate vehicle
Owner's Manual
Selecting the seat
Rfor
Exiting the display
Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
the desired display (clock or fuel consumption) is shown.
Seat functions
First select the seat which you wish to adjust.
This function is not available for all vehicles.
X Press the T or W button.
X Select Seat and press W to confirm.
X To switch to the lower line, for both options
slide VÆ the COMAND controller.
X Select Driver's seat or Front-pass.
seat by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Overview
Using the T button next to the COMAND
controller or the Seat menu item in the system menu, you can call up different setting
functions: The following settings depend on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
Adjustment functions
To adjust the seat cushion length
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
Rseat
cushion length
side bolsters
Rlumbar
Rbalance
Rcushion side bolsters
Rdriving dynamics
Rmassage
Rbackrest
i You also can save and recall the current
settings of a seat function using the memory button and the corresponding memory
position switch; see the separate vehicle
Owner's Manual.
This function allows you to adjust the height
of the seat cushion.
Seat functions
Select the seat (Y page 54).
Select Seat surface by turning cVd the
COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
A scale appears.
X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest
(backrest side bolsters)
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
Select the seat (Y page 54).
Select Backr. sides by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A scale appears.
X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
This function allows you to adjust the air
cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest
(4-way lumbar support).
X Select the seat (Y page 54).
X Select Lumbar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A crosshair appears. You can make two
settings:
RVertical: to move the point of greatest
lumbar support up or down
RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of support
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
i For vehicle model series with a dynamic
multicontour seat: if the driving dynamics
are activated and respond to a change of
direction (e.g. when cornering), the backrest side bolsters cannot be temporarily
adjusted.
Adjusting the seat side bolsters
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
Vehicle functions
55
Vehicle functions
56
Seat functions
The values stand for:
This function allows you to adjust the air
cushions in the seat side bolsters.
X Select the seat (Y page 54).
X Select Seat sides by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A scale appears.
X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
equally to the maximum level
to 3 - the heat output to the seat cushion is reduced in one-third increments
R-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrest
is reduced in one-third increments
X Slide cVd or turn XVY the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
Balance
Massage function
The availability of this function depends on
the vehicle model series.
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
The Balance function controls the distribution
of heat on the seat backrest and cushion.
The Balance function influences the currently
set heating level of the seat heating; see the
separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
X Select the seat (Y page 54).
X Select Balance by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A scale appears and shows the current setting. Positive values indicate the heat output for the seat backrest, negative values
indicate the heat output for the seat cushion. The intensity is indicated by an orange
bar in the stylised seat above the scale.
Example display (M-Class or GL-Class)
R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heated
R1
Select the seat (Y page 54).
Select Massage by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A list appears.
You can select different types of massage
function:
R0:
Off
Slow
R2: Slow
R3: Fast
R4: Fast
R1:
and
and
and
and
gentle
vigorous
gentle
vigorous
Reversing camera
Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
The massage function runs for approximately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on the
setting.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
Resetting all adjustments
Setting the driving dynamics
This function is available on vehicle model
series with a dynamic multicontour seat.
Select the seat (Y page 54).
Select Reset all by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A query appears.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
After you select Yes, all seat adjustments
are reset to the default values (factory setting).
Select the seat (Y page 54).
Select Dynamic seat by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A scale appears.
You can select:
R0:
Off
level 1 (medium setting)
R2: level 2 (high setting)
X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
R1:
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not
a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals
or objects in range while manoeuvring and
parking.
The image from the reversing camera is
shown in the COMAND display when reverse
gear is engaged if:
Ryour
vehicle is equipped with a reversing
camera
RCOMAND Online is switched on
Rthe Activation by R gear function is
activated.
If the function is activated, the COMAND display will automatically switch back to the pre-
Vehicle functions
57
360° camera
58
viously selected display as soon as you shift
out of reverse gear.
i For further information on the reversing
Vehicle functions
camera, see separate vehicle Owner's
Manual.
Press the W function button.
The system menu appears.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Rear view camera and press W to
confirm.
Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Night View Assist Plus
On vehicles with Night View Assist Plus you
can have the image from Night View Assist
Plus shown on the COMAND display.
X Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 29).
X Activating Night View Assist Plus .
Activating Night View Assist Plus, see the
separate operating instructions.
The image from Night View Assist Plus
appears in the COMAND display.
To adjust the brightness: adjust the
Brightness by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
To switch off the display: select Back and
press W to confirm or press the % button.
360° camera
Important notes
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the immediate
surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals
or objects in range while manoeuvring and
parking.
Overview
The 360° camera covers the immediate surroundings of the vehicle and assists you, for
instance when parking or at exits with
reduced visibility. It detects moving objects
and displays these objects at the bottom
using bars.
Displaying the image from the 360°
camera
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Ryour
vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
RCOMAND Online is switched on
(Y page 29)
Rthe 360° camera function is activated
You can activate the 360° display by:
Rengaging
reverse gear (only possible if the
Activation by R gear option is activated)
Rselecting the 360° camera menu item in
the System menu
Rpressing and holding the W function key
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
30 km/h with the function activated, the
function switches off. The previous display
appears on the COMAND display.
You can also switch the display by selecting
the & symbol in the display and pressing
W the COMAND controller to confirm.
X
To activate/deactivate using the
reverse gear: press the W function key.
The system menu appears.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select 360° camera and press W to confirm.
Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
i This function must only be switched on if
you want the image from the 360° camera
to be displayed when the reverse gear is
engaged. The other activation options are
always available.
X To display the image from the 360°
camera: press the W function key for
longer than 2 seconds.
The full image will appear.
or
X Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select 360° camera and press W to confirm.
The split view of the 360° camera appears.
or
X Engage reverse gear (only possible if the
Activation by R gear option is activated)
The 360° camera in split view and the
reverse drive image appears.
For a detailed description of the 360° camera, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
59
Vehicle functions
360° camera
60
Features of your COMAND Online ..... 62
Introduction ......................................... 62
Basic settings ...................................... 64
Entering a destination ........................ 65
Entering a POI ...................................... 78
Personal POIs ...................................... 82
ViaMichelin travel guide ..................... 87
Route guidance ................................... 90
Dynamic route guidance .................. 103
Destination memory ......................... 106
Last destinations .............................. 110
Map operation and map settings .... 111
Additional settings ........................... 120
Problems with the navigation system ..................................................... 126
Navigation
61
62
Introduction
Features of your COMAND Online
Navigation
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Introduction
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communications equipment in the vehicle
while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND Online.
COMAND Online calculates the route to the
destination without taking account of the following, for example:
Rtraffic
lights
and give way signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
COMAND Online may give incorrect driving
recommendations if the data on the digital
map does not correspond to the actual conditions. For example, a route may have been
diverted or the direction of a one-way street
may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
Rstop
your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
In vehicles for certain countries, the navigation system is not operational immediately
after delivery. The digital map is not preinstalled.
If this is the case, the following message
appears in the display after you switch to navigation mode:
Please insert the map DVD to acti‐
vate navigation.
X To install the digital map:(Y page 124).
The navigation system must determine the
position of the vehicle before first use or
whenever operational status is restored.
Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
before precise route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Correct functioning of the navigation system
depends, amongst other things, on GPS
reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g.
in tunnels or multi-storey car parks.
i The functionality of a roof aerial (telephone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carriers are used.
Entry restriction
On vehicles for certain countries, there is a
restriction on entering data.
The restriction is active above a vehicle speed
of about 5 km/h. The restriction is deactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below
about 3 km/h.
Introduction
63
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are greyed out
and cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering
the destination town and street
a destination via the map
Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a town or via
a name search
Rediting entries
Rdirect entry using the number keypad
Other entries are possible, however, such as
entering POIs in the vicinity of the destination
or current position.
Map without the menu; route guidance inactive
: Current vehicle position
; Map orientation selected
= Map scale selected
i Route guidance active means that you
have entered a destination and that
COMAND Online has calculated the route.
The display shows the route, changes of
direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements guide you to your
destination.
Route guidance inactive means that no
destination has been entered and no route
has been calculated yet.
Switching to navigation mode
Showing/hiding the menu
Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive
: Status bar
; Main function bar
= Current vehicle position
? Navigation menu bar
Press the Ø function button.
The map is displayed with the menu either
shown or hidden.
or
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The map is displayed with the menu shown.
You can show or hide the menu on the map.
X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
or
X Press the % back button.
The map can be seen in the full-screen display.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller when the map is shown in fullscreen display.
Navigation
Rentering
Basic settings
64
Basic settings
Navigation
Setting route type and route options
Route settings menu (start of menu)
: To select the route type
; To set route options
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Route settings and press W to
confirm.
The route settings menu appears.
X Select a route type and press W to confirm.
A filled circle indicates the current setting.
You can select the following route types:
RFast
route: COMAND Online calculates a
route with the shortest (minimised) journey
time.
RDynamic route: same route type as Fast
route. In addition, COMAND Online takes
into account any RDS-TMC traffic reports it
receives during route guidance. The navigation system can help you avoid a traffic
jam, for example. If a faster route is determined due to a received RDS-TMC traffic
announcement, the navigation system
changes the route. If possible, it will bypass
blocked roads.
REco route: the Eco route (economical
route) is a variant of the Fast route type.
COMAND Online will attempt to minimise
the journey distance at the expense of a
slightly increased journey time.
RShort route: COMAND Online calculates
a route with the shortest possible (minimised) route distance.
i RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
i The route calculated may, for example,
include ferry connections, even if the
Avoid ferries route option is switched
on.
In some cases, e.g. when calculating particularly long routes, COMAND Online may
not be able to take all the selected route
options into account.
Select the route option(s) and press W to
confirm.
The route options are switched on O or off
ª, depending on the previous status.
i If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is
active, COMAND Online will calculate a
new route.
If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is inactive, COMAND Online uses the new setting
for the next route guidance.
Route guidance active: a destination has
been entered and the route has been calculated.
Route guidance inactive: no destination
has been entered yet and no route has been
calculated yet.
i To avoid toll roads: route calculation is
performed excluding sections (e.g. tunnels,
stretches of motorway, inner cities) which
require you to pay a fee (toll).
To avoid routes requiring a special toll
sticker: route calculation is performed
excluding route networks (e.g. a country's
motorway network) which require you to
pay a fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network. Example
time limits are 10 days, 2 months or 1 year.
To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller.
Entering a destination
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communications equipment in the vehicle
while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
This step-by-step example of how to enter an
address uses the following example data:
Germany
Berlin
Unstrutstraße 1
You can of course enter any country, town,
street and house number desired and enter,
for example your home address (My address).
Calling up the address entry menu
Navigation
Entering a destination
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND Online.
Entering a destination by address
Introduction
Options for destination entry:
Renter
the country, town/postcode, street
and house number
Renter the country, town/postcode and
street
Renter the country, town/postcode and
centre
Renter the country, town/postcode, street
and junction
Renter the country and town
Country and town are sufficient to start navigating. You can enter either a town or a postcode. By entering further address data such
as the street and house number, you can
specify the destination more precisely.
i You can only enter a street, house number, junction or centre once you have
entered a country and a town or postcode.
i You can only enter those towns, streets,
postcodes etc. that are stored in the digital
map. This means that for some countries,
you cannot enter postcodes, for example.
65
Address entry menu
Calling up the address entry menu
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Destination in the lower menu bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Select Address entry and press W to
confirm.
The address entry menu appears. If you
have previously entered a destination, this
will be shown in the display.
Depending on the sequence in which you
enter the address and on the data status of
the digital map, some menu items may not be
available at all or may not yet be available.
Example: after country selection the Street,
No., Centr. (centre), Junct. (junction), POI,
Save and Start menu items are not yet available. The Postcode menu item will not be
available unless the digital map contains
postcodes.
Entering a destination
66
Entering the country, city, street, house
number
Select GERMANY by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again.
GERMANY has now been entered.
Entering a town
Navigation
Country list with character bar
Enter country
Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Country in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You see the list of countries with the character bar.
Entering characters using town input as an
example (Y page 36).
Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Town in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the town list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Town list with character bar
Option 1: town list with character bar
Enter BERLIN. Entering characters using
town input as an example (Y page 36).
Country list as selection list
To switch to the country list as a selection list: select ¬ in the character bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
or
List of towns as selection list
Slide ZV the COMAND controller once or
twice.
Entering a destination
Option 2: town list as selection list
Option 1: street list with character bar
Enter UNSTRUTSTRASSE. Entering characters using town input as an example
(Y page 36).
Navigation
Select BERLIN by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Entries with the G: icon cannot be
uniquely assigned. Another selection list is
shown.
Street list as selection list
Option 2: street list as selection list
Select BERLIN(1XXXX) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again.
BERLIN(1XXXX) has now been entered.
Select UNSTRUTSTRASSE by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
UNSTRUTSTRASSE has now been entered.
Entering a street
Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Street in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the street list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
67
Entering a house number
Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select No. in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the house number list either
with the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Street list with character bar
Entering a destination
68
Navigation
Starting route calculation
House number list with character bar
Option 1: house number list with character
bar
Address entry menu with destination address
: Destination address
; To start route calculation
Enter 1. Entering characters using town
input as an example (Y page 36).
House number list as selection list
Option 2: house number list as selection list
Select 1 by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again. 1
has now been entered.
You can now have COMAND Online calculate
a route to the destination address you have
entered, or you can save it.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X In the address entry menu, confirm Start
by pressing W.
If no other route has been calculated, route
calculation starts immediately (option 1). If
another route has already been calculated
(route guidance is active), a prompt
appears (option 2).
Option 1 – no route guidance active: route
calculation starts. While route calculation is
in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will
see a message, e.g. Calculating fast
route....
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins. If the vehicle is travelling on
a non-digitised road, the system displays the
linear distance to the destination, the direction of the destination and the Off road
message. In this case, the display will be
greyed out.
Option 2 – route guidance is already
active: if route guidance is already active, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to terminate the currently active route guidance.
Entering a destination
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online will stop
route guidance and start route calculation
for the new destination.
If you select No, COMAND Online will continue with the active route guidance.
i Route calculation takes a certain amount
of time. The time depends on the distance
from the destination, for example.
COMAND Online calculates the route using
the digital map data.
The calculated route may differ from the
ideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incomplete map data. Please also refer to the
notes about the digital map (Y page 124).
Entering a postcode, centre and junction
Entering a postcode
Entering a postcode will delete a previously
entered town.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Postcode in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the postcode list either with
the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).
Entering and storing your home address
You can either enter your home address for
the first time (option 1) or edit a previously
stored home address (option 2).
X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a town,
street and house number (Y page 65).
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Save in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Save as "My address" and press
W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores your home address
as My address in the destination memory.
Option 2: proceed as described under
"Option 1".
A prompt appears asking whether the current home address should be overwritten.
Select Yes and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes, the Saving proce‐
dure successful message appears.
List of postcodes with character bar
Option 1: postcode list with character bar
Enter a postcode. Entering characters
using town input as an example
(Y page 36).
Postcode list as selection list
Navigation
69
Entering a destination
70
Option 1: centre list with character bar
Select the desired postcode by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
If COMAND Online can assign the postcode
to one town unambiguously (e.g. 74172 for
NECKARSULM), the address entry menu
appears again. You can now complete the
address, e.g. by entering a street.
If COMAND Online cannot assign the postcode unambiguously to a specific address,
the address entry menu also appears again.
The postcode is automatically entered. You
can now enter the street for a more precise
location. Only streets in the area covered
by the entered postcode are available.
Navigation
Option 2: postcode list as selection list
Start route calculation (Y page 68).
Entering a town centre
Entering a centre will, for example, delete a
previously entered street.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Centr. (centre) in the address entry
menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the centre list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Town centre list with character bar
Enter a centre. Entering characters using
town input as an example (Y page 36).
i In big cities, you can also enter the centres of districts.
Centre list as selection list
Option 2: centre list as a selection list
Select a centre by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
For options 1 and 2:
Confirm your selection by pressing W.
The address entry menu appears again. The
centre selected has been entered.
X Start route calculation (Y page 68).
Entering a junction
Entering a junction will delete a previously
entered house number.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Junct. (junction) in the address
entry menu by turning cVd and sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You will see the junction list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Entering a destination
71
Option 1: junction list with character bar
An entry named "My address" can always be
found at the top of the destination memory.
You may wish to assign your home address to
this entry, for example, and select it for route
guidance. Further information on entering a
home address (Y page 69).
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Junction list with character bar
Enter a junction. Entering characters using
town input as an example (Y page 36).
Junction list as selection list
Option 2: junction list as selection list
Select a junction by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Entries with the G: icon cannot be
uniquely assigned. Another selection list is
shown.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
junction selected has been entered.
Destination memory list with character bar
Option 1: destination memory list with character bar
Enter a destination, e.g. "My address".
Enter characters (Y page 36).
Start route calculation (Y page 68).
Navigation
Selecting a destination from the destination memory
Entering a destination
72
Navigation
Entering a destination from the list of
last destinations
Destination memory list as selection list
Option 2: destination memory list as a selection list
Last destinations
Select My address by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
"My address" has been entered.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
Select the desired destination by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
destination address selected has been
entered.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins (Y page 68).
: Starting route calculation
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory (Y page 110).
Entering a destination
Calling up the map
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
To select a destination: press W the
COMAND controller.
If the crosshair lies outside the digital map,
COMAND Online uses the nearest digitised
road for route calculation. The The cross‐
hair is outside the digitalised
area of the map message is shown. If the
crosshair is located over a body of water,
you will see the message: The destina‐
tion is located in a body of
water. Please select another des‐
tination.
Select OK and press W to confirm.
If the destination is within the limits of the
digital map, COMAND Online attempts to
assign the destination to the map.
If the destination can be assigned, you will
see the address entry menu with the
address of the destination. If not, you will
see the Destination from map entry.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Map with crosshair
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
? Map scale selected
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Using map and press W to confirm.
The map with crosshair is shown.
Display = depends on the settings selected
in "Map information in the display"
(Y page 114). If the digital map contains the
necessary data, the current road is shown. If
the geo-coordinates display is switched on,
the geo-coordinates of the crosshair are
shown.
Entering a destination using geo-coordinates
Moving the map and selecting the destination
Call up the destination entry via the map
(Y page 73).
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
Geo-coordinates input menu
Navigation
Entering a destination using the map
73
Entering a destination
Navigation
74
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Using geo-coordinates and
press W to confirm.
The geo-coordinates input menu is shown.
You can now enter the latitude and longitude
coordinates with the COMAND controller or
the number keypad (Y page 37).
X To change a value: turn cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To move the selection within the line:
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
X To move the selection between lines:
slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
X To confirm the value: press W the
COMAND controller.
i If the selected position is outside the digital map, COMAND Online uses the nearest
digitised road for route calculation. You will
see the The co-ordinates are out‐
side the map message. If the selected
position is located over a body of water, you
will see the The destination is loca‐
ted in a body of water. Please
select another destination. message.
Entering a destination using
Mercedes-Benz Apps
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Mercedes-Benz Apps and press
W to confirm.
If an Internet connection is established, you
will see the message Do you want to
accept the navigation data sent
via Mercedes-Benz Apps?
Street View
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Destination in the lower menu bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Address entry and press W to
confirm.
X Select icon : in the address entry menu
and press W to confirm.
If an Internet connection is established, you
will see the Street View basic display.
X To explore the view of the street: turn
cVd or slide XVY, ZVÆ the COMAND
controller.
X To return to the navigation system:
press the % button.
Entering a destination
75
Entering waypoints
You can map the route yourself by entering
up to four waypoints. The sequence of the
waypoints can be changed at any time.
COMAND Online provides a selection of predefined destinations in eight categories for
this purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or COF‐
FEE SHOP. You can also use the destination
entry options to enter waypoints.
Creating waypoints
Waypoint menu (with destination, without waypoint)
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Way points and press W to confirm.
The destination is entered into the waypoints menu. The waypoints are not yet
entered.
Confirm Add: by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
Select the category or Other by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
After selecting a category, the POIs which
are available along the route and in the
vicinity are displayed.
COMAND Online first searches for destinations along the route. If there are no destinations available there, it then continues
searching for destinations within a radius
of approximately 100 km of the vehicle
position.
X After selecting Other, select one of the
destination entry options from the list.
Selection
Step
Address entry
Enter a destination by address
(Y page 65).
From memory
Select a destination from the destination memory
(Y page 71).
From last desti‐
nations
Select a destination from the list
of last destinations (Y page 72).
From POIs
Select a POI
(Y page 78).
Navigation
Introduction
Entering a destination
76
Selection
Step
From personal
POIs
Navigation
Using map
Using geo-coor‐
dinates
Enter a destination from the personal POIs
(Y page 86).
Enter a destination using the map
(Y page 73).
Enter a destination using the geocoordinates
(Y page 73).
To accept the waypoint: confirm OK by
pressing W.
When you have accepted the waypoint, it is
entered in the waypoint menu.
To display the details: select Details by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
To make a call: select Call with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online switches to telephone mode (Y page 140).
i This menu item is available if the waypoint
has a telephone number and a mobile
phone is connected to COMAND Online
(Y page 132).
X To call up the map: select Map with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the destination.
To store the waypoint in the destination
memory: select Presets with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 109).
Select POI and press W to confirm.
After selecting a POI or entering a destination, the address of the waypoint is displayed.
After entering a destination using the map,
the address entry menu is displayed. OK is
highlighted.
Waypoint menu with two waypoint entries
Editing waypoints
You can:
Rchange
waypoints
Rchange the sequence in the waypoint menu
Rdeleted
Entering a destination
You can change the sequence of the waypoints and the destination.
X To change the sequence: from the menu,
select Move by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
move the waypoint or destination to the
desired position, then press W to confirm.
Select a waypoint in the waypoint menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To delete waypoints: from the menu,
select Delete and press W to confirm.
Accepting waypoints for the route
Select Start in the waypoint menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The route is calculated with the entered
waypoints.
i Continue is displayed instead of Start
when Calculate alternative routes
is activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 97).
i If a waypoint has been passed during
To change a waypoint: select Edit from
the menu and press W to confirm.
X Change the address, e.g. the town and
street, and confirm with OK.
The waypoint menu appears and displays
the modified waypoint.
route guidance, the waypoint will be displayed in the waypoint menu with a green
arrow. Once the route has been recalculated, the waypoint is deleted from the waypoint menu.
Searching for a filling station when the
fuel level is low
If the reserve fuel warning is displayed, you
will see the message: Fuel tank reserve
level. Do you want to start the
search for filling stations?.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the filling station search
starts. When the search is complete, a list
of the filling stations available along the
route or in the vicinity is displayed.
Navigation
To change the sequence, at least one waypoint and the destination must be entered.
77
Entering a POI
78
If you select No, the search is cancelled.
Select a filling station and press W to confirm.
The address of the filling station is displayed.
X Confirm Start by pressing W.
The selected filling station is entered into
position 1 of the waypoints menu. Route
guidance begins.
If the waypoints menu already contains
four waypoints, a prompt will be displayed,
asking you whether you wish to enter the
filling station into position 1. If you select
Yes, the filling station is transferred into the
list and waypoint 4 is deleted.
Select From POIs and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Choose one of the options and press W to
confirm.
Further steps are arranged in a table
according to the option selected
(Y page 79).
Navigation
Entering a POI
Calling up the POI menu
Example: POI menu
POIs are predefined destinations within categories, e.g. a filling station in the AUTOMO‐
TIVE category.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Entering a POI
79
Defining the position for the POI search
Selection
Characteristic
Instructions
In the vicinity
of the destina‐
tion
Entry is only possible
when route guidance is
active.
Current posi‐
tion
The system looks for a
POI in the vicinity of the
current vehicle position.
Other town
Option 1
After entering a town,
the system looks for the X Select Other town in the POI menu and
POI within the town.
press W to confirm.
X Select the country, if desired
(Y page 66).
X Enter the town. Proceed as described in
the "Entering a town" section
(Y page 66).
X Select a POI category (Y page 80).
Select Current position in the POI
menu and press W to confirm.
X Select a POI category (Y page 80).
Option 2
Enter a town in the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
Select POI and press W to confirm.
Select a POI category (Y page 65).
Search by name
You can call up all the
POIs in the digital map or
focus your search on the
three previously selected positions.
Search by phone
number
This function gives you
access to all POIs that
have a phone number.
Select Search by name in the POI menu
and press W to confirm.
X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected positions.
The POI list with character bar appears.
X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 81).
Select Search by phone number and
press W to confirm.
You will see a list of phone numbers.
X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 81).
Navigation
Select Near destination from the POI
menu and press W to confirm.
X Select a POI category (Y page 80).
Entering a POI
80
Navigation
Search by POI category
Example: POI search near the current position
POI category list
Calling up the POI menu (Y page 78).
After entering a town, the POI category list
appears after choosing the menu item
Near destination, Current position
or Other town.
X Select a POI category by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The G arrow behind an entry shows
that other categories are available.
The example shows a search after selection
of the FILLING STATION entry.
i The POI search is cancelled when 50 POIs
have been found.
COMAND Online searches within a radius
of approximately 100 km.
Once the search is completed, the POI list
is displayed.
If COMAND Online does not find any POIs
within this radius, it extends its search
range to approximately 200 km.
If COMAND Online finds one POI within this
radius, it finishes the search.
POI list
Introduction
FILLING STATION category selected
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The search for POIs begins in the vicinity of
the selected position.
Example: POI list
The POI list displays the search results for the
category in the vicinity of the selected position.
Entering a POI
Ran
arrow that shows the linear direction to
the POI
Rthe linear distance to the POI
Rthe name of the POI
i The arrow and linear distance to the destination are not visible if you have entered
a POI after entering another town.
The arrow is also not shown when searching for a POI in the vicinity of the destination.
Depending on the POI selected,
COMAND Online uses different reference
points in determining the linear distance to
the destination:
Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis-
tance is the distance from the current
vehicle position to the POI.
Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance
is the distance of the POI from the destination entered.
Selecting a POI
mation on searching via POI categories
(Y page 80).
X Select the POI in the POI list by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The full address of the POI selected
appears.
To start route calculation: select
Start; and press W to confirm.
X To store an address in the destination
memory: select Save= and press W to
confirm. You can now select storing
options (Y page 109).
X To show the detailed view: select
Details? and press W to confirm.
X To make a call: select CallA and press
W to confirm. COMAND Online switches to
telephone mode (Y page 139).
i This menu item is available if the POI has
a telephone number and a mobile phone is
connected to COMAND Online
(Y page 132).
X To call up the map: select MapB and
press W to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the destination (Y page 73).
POI list with character bar
: POI with address
; To start route calculation
= To store an address in the destination
memory
? To display details
A To make a call (when available)
B To display a POI's position on the map
The example has been selected in the BAR
& RESTAURANT POI category. Further infor-
Example: search by name in the vicinity of the destination
If you have selected Search by name in the
POI menu and then defined the position for
Navigation
The search results display the following information:
81
Personal POIs
Navigation
82
the search (Y page 79), the POI list with character bar appears.
Depending on your selection, you can select
all available POIs on the digital map or the
POIs in the vicinity of the selected position.
X Proceed as described in "Searching for a
phone book entry" (Y page 145).
If COMAND Online can assign the characters entered to one entry unambiguously,
the address entry appears automatically.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Selecting a POI using the map
the icons that you want COMAND Online to
display.
If there are POIs, you will see a message to
this effect.
i You also see this message if you have
selected the No symbols menu item under
"Map display" (Y page 113).
X To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
To select a POI: select Next or Previous
and press W to confirm.
To show details for the selection: select
Details and press W to confirm.
To change to the map: slide ZV the
COMAND controller.
You can move the map and select the map
section.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the POI
should be used as the destination.
POI on the map
You can select POIs that are available in the
selected (visible) section of the map. The POI
is highlighted on the map, you will see further
information on the upper edge of the display.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Guide in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If POIs are available:
Depending on the map scale selected, POI
icons appear on the map. The scale at
which the icons are displayed on the map
varies according to the icon. You can select
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, route guidance starts.
If you select No, you can choose a new POI.
i Continue is displayed instead of Start
when Calculate alternative routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 97).
Personal POIs
General notes
i The use of personal POIs to display traffic
monitoring installations is not permitted in
all countries. Please observe the countryspecific regulations and always drive at a
suitable speed.
Settings
Calling up the "Personal POIs" menu
"Personal POIs" menu
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Personal POIs and press W to
confirm.
Selection
Explanation
ªNot clas‐
sified
Standard entry for personal POIs
ªCOMAND
Online
Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you
have imported via the
online function
(Y page 185).
If you have created your own categories (e.g.
"Café", "Top 10"), they are also displayed
(Y page 84).
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
The icon display is switched on O or off
ª, depending on the previous status.
i The icons are displayed on the 50 m,
100 m, 200 m and 500 m map scales.
Visual information for personal POIs
Displaying personal POIs on the map
Example: visual information for a personal POI
The personal POIs are shown on the map with
an icon according to their category.
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 83).
X Select Display personal POIs on map
in the menu and press W to confirm.
You can select different categories.
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI,
this is highlighted on the map. The display for
the corresponding category must be activated for this.
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 83).
X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis‐
ual warning for personal POIs and
press W to confirm.
The menu displays the available categories.
83
Navigation
Personal POIs
Personal POIs
84
Select a category and press W to confirm.
This will switch the visual warning for all
personal POIs of this category on O or off
ª, depending on the previous setting.
Navigation
Acoustic notification for personal POIs
A gong sounds when the vehicle is approaching a personal POI. The function for the corresponding category must be activated for
this.
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 83).
X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Acous‐
tic notification for personal POIs
and press W to confirm.
The menu displays the available categories.
Select a category and press W to confirm.
This will switch the acoustic notification for
all personal POIs of this category on O or
off ª, depending on the previous setting.
To create a new category: select New and
press W to confirm.
X Enter the name of the category. Character
entry (Y page 34).
X Select the ¬ symbol and press W to
confirm.
A list with symbols appears. You can assign
a symbol to the category.
Managing categories for personal POIs
Select an icon by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You have created a new category with a
name and icon. This category appears
when selecting the display on the map or
when selecting the destination.
To rename a category, to change an
icon: select Rename or Change icon and
press W to confirm.
X Proceed as described under "To create a
new category".
Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 83).
X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man‐
age categories for personal POIs
and press W to confirm.
To delete a category: select Delete and
press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the category should be deleted.
i If you delete a category, all POIs of this
category are also deleted.
X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the category will be
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Personal POIs
Managing personal POIs
Option 2
Observe the additional information on managing personal POI categories (Y page 86):
RRenaming
RChanging the category
RDeleting
Saving personal POIs
There are three ways of saving personal POIs.
You must insert an SD memory card to do so.
The No memory card message otherwise
appears.
Personal POIs and routes are saved on the
memory card in the same data format in
which the geographical data is stored. This
format is based on the open GPX (GPS
Exchange) format.
Option 1
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X Hide the menu to show the map in full
screen mode (Y page 63).
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
than two seconds.
The current position of the vehicle is saved
as a personal POI on the SD memory card
in the Not classified category.
i The crosshair position is saved in the
scrolling map function (Y page 112).
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Save position as pers. POI or
Save crosshair pos. as personal
POI ("Move map" function active) and press
W to confirm.
The list of personal categories appears.
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
X Enter the name for the personal POI. Character entry (Y page 34).
Option 3
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Save from the address entry menu
and press W to confirm.
X Select Save as personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
POI on the SD memory card.
Importing personal POIs via the online
function
You can import personal POIs (destinations,
routes) via the online function (Y page 185).
When importing, you can choose whether to
write files to the SD memory card or to file
them in the address book. The imported personal POIs have their own icon and are filed
in the COMAND Online category.
Navigation
Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 83).
X Select Manage personal POIs in the
menu and press W to confirm.
X Select Not classified, COMAND Online
or your own category and press W to confirm.
X Select a personal POI and press W to confirm.
The personal POI is displayed.
85
Personal POIs
86
Navigation
Selecting as the destination
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From personal POIs and press
W to confirm.
The categories of personal POIs appear.
Selection
Explanation
Not classi‐
fied
Standard entry for personal POIs.
COMAND
Online
Personal POIs which you
have imported via the
online function
(Y page 185).
COFFEE SHOP
Icon and category that
you have created yourself
(Y page 84).
In the example, the COMAND Online category
is selected.
The personal POIs received are displayed.
Select a personal POI and press W to confirm.
To rename a personal POI: select
Rename and press W to confirm.
To change the category: select Change
category and press W to confirm.
To change to the map: select Map and
press W to confirm.
The position of the personal POI is shown
in the map.
i An icon is displayed according to the "Displaying personal POIs on the map" setting
(Y page 83).
X To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
If route guidance has been activated, a
prompt will appear asking whether you
wish to accept the personal POI as the destination.
ViaMichelin travel guide
To make a call: select Call and press W
to confirm. COMAND Online switches to
telephone mode (Y page 141).
i Call is available if the personal POI has a
telephone number and a mobile phone is
connected to COMAND Online
(Y page 132).
X To delete a personal POI: select Delete
and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the POI.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal POI is
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
memory card. First place the SD memory card
in the SD card slot (Y page 217).
You can download available updates from the
Mercedes-Benz webshop.
i You can also subsequently obtain travel
guide data from the Mercedes-Benz Accessory webshop.
The travel guide offers you tourist destinations and routes:
Rin the vicinity of the current vehicle position
Ralong
the calculated route
the vicinity of the destination
Rthrough selection on the map
Ron a specific topic, for example, Paris, the
Alps or German wine routes
You can select:
Rin
Rwhich
travel guide data on the map can be
shown and selected (e.g. restaurants and
tourist routes)
Rwhether information on tourist destinations is read out as you approach them
Activating/deactivating travel guide
data
ViaMichelin travel guide
Overview
Categories for the display of travel guide data on
the map
If COMAND Online offers the ViaMichelin
travel guide in navigation mode, you can
select tourist destinations, including routes.
In this case, the travel guide data is on a SD
Travel guide data is stored in categories, such
as e.g. restaurants or tourist routes. In the
menu, you can select which travel guide categories are shown on the map, and therefore
which can be selected. You can also determine whether available information on the
Navigation
If route guidance has not been activated,
route calculation for the personal POI will
start immediately.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal POI is accepted as the destination.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
87
Navigation
88
ViaMichelin travel guide
tourist destination of a particular category is
acoustically provided as you approach it.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu bar: press W the
COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Travel guide and press W to confirm.
X Select Map icons or Acoustic
announcement and press W to confirm.
The menu displays the available categories.
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
Switch the category on O or off ª.
If you selected Map icons and switched on
a category, you can select the available
tourist destinations of that category on the
map.
If you selected Acoustic announcement
and switched on a category, you hear information as you approach a tourist destination. The information must be available as
an audio file for this destination.
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu bar: press W the
COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Travel guide and press W to confirm.
X No destination has been entered yet:
select Current position, Using map or
Topics.
X A route has already been entered: you
can also select Along the route and
Near destination.
Using the guide
Calling up the travel guide
Using destination entry
Selecting search position for travel guide (using
destination entry)
Selecting search position for travel guide (using
guide)
ViaMichelin travel guide
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu bar: press W the
COMAND controller.
X Select Guide in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Travel guide and press W to confirm.
X No destination has been entered yet:
select Current position, Using map or
Topics.
X A route has already been entered: you
can also select Along the route and
Near destination.
Selecting topics
You can choose from a variety of topics. Topics can be listed based on places (e.g.countryside) or on content (e.g. wine guide).
X Call up the travel guide (Y page 88).
X Select Topics.
A list appears.
X Select a topic and press W to confirm.
The system selects a map view that allows
the tourist destinations and routes for the
topic to be displayed.
X Select a tourist destination or route on the
map and press W to confirm.
Selecting a destination or a route on
the map
To select tourist destinations/routes, first
select the search position and then the corresponding symbol on the map.
X Call up the travel guide (Y page 88).
X Select a search position, e.g. Using map.
The map appears.
X Select a menu item and press W to confirm
(see table).
Menu item
Explanation
Settings
In the settings, you can
select which selectable
travel guide data is shown
on the map.
Prev. (previous) or Next
Highlights the previous or
next symbol on the map.
Details
Shows detailed information about the destination
or route. You may also
use further functions, e.g.
calling the hotel or listening to an audio file about
the place of interest (if
available).
Navigation
89
Route guidance
Navigation
90
Menu item
Explanation
Map
Switches to the map with
the crosshair. You can
slide the crosshair and
change the map scale.
Start
Begins route calculation
for the selected destination.
Exploring the destination or route
Before the route calculation, you can call up
useful information on the selected destination.
To play an audio file: select M and press
W to confirm.
You hear useful information about the tourist destination.
X To stop playback, select ¯ and press W
to confirm.
X To call the destination: select Call and
press W to confirm.
If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
Online, the telephone function is activated
and the call is connected (Y page 141).
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
i Not every tourist destination or route has
images, texts or audio files available.
Example: tourist route is displayed
Destination address is displayed (example)
Call up the travel guide (Y page 88).
X Select a search position, e.g. Using map.
The map appears.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The destination address is shown.
To display images: select Images and
press W to confirm.
One or more photos of the tourist destination are shown.
X To display text information: select Info
and press W to confirm.
A short text provides interesting details
about the tourist destination.
If you have selected a tourist route, the map
shows an overview of the route.
Above, the following functions are described:
Rdisplaying
pictures
text information
Rplaying an audio file
Rcalling up the destination
X To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Rshowing
Route guidance
Important notes
COMAND Online calculates the route to the
destination without taking account of the following, for example:
Rtraffic
Rstop
lights
and give way signs
Route guidance
or stopping restrictions
narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
COMAND Online may give differing driving
recommendations if the data on the digital
map does not correspond to the actual conditions, such as if the road layout has
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over system
driving recommendations.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (Y page 68).
COMAND Online guides you to your destination by means of navigation announcements
in the form of audible navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
The route guidance displays can be seen if the
display is switched to navigation mode.
If you do not follow the navigation announcements or if you leave the calculated route,
COMAND Online automatically calculates a
new route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applies:
Rroad
Rduring
route guidance, COMAND Online
tries to avoid roads with restricted access.
Those roads, for example, that are closed
to through-traffic.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the
relevant times must be correctly stored in
the database.
Displays during route guidance
Changing direction
Changes of direction have three phases:
Rpreparation
phase
phase
Rchange-of-direction phase
Rannouncement
Navigation
Rparking
91
Example: preparation phase
: Point at which the change of direction
takes place (light blue dot)
; Next road
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
? Current road
Display ? depends on the setting selected
under "Map information in the display"
(Y page 114).
COMAND Online prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is
announced by the Prepare to turn
right message. You see the full-screen map.
Navigation
92
Route guidance
Example: announcement phase
: Next road
Example: change-of-direction phase
: Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
; Point at which the change of direction
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
; Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
= Distance to the next change of direction
takes place (light blue dot, shown in both
the left and right half of the display)
Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
Change of direction (turn right here)
Distance to the next change of direction
Route (blue line, shown in both the left
and right half of the display)
i The filled-in section of visual display for
distance = gets shorter the nearer you get
to the announced change of direction.
COMAND Online announces the imminent
change of direction. Based on the example
display below, the change of direction is
announced beforehand by the message: In
400 metres turn right onto the A81.
The display is now split into two sectors. In
the left half, you see the normal map view.
The right-hand half shows:
COMAND Online announces the imminent
change of direction.
Based on the example display below, the
change of direction is announced 40 metres
before the change of direction with the Now
turn right message.
The display is split into two halves, as in the
announcement phase.
Once the change of direction is completed,
COMAND Online automatically switches back
to full-screen display.
Ran
enlarged section of the area around the
junction (crossing zoom) or
Ra 3D image of the road's course with the
route indicating the next change of direction
Example display: roundabout
Route guidance
Example of a display without a change
of direction
93
E Non-recommended lanes (light brown or
light grey)
F Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
: Route (highlighted in blue)
; Current vehicle position
= Current road
? Map orientation selected
A Map scale selected
Lane recommendations
On multilane roads, COMAND Online can display lane recommendations for the next
change of direction. The corresponding data
must be available on the digital map.
COMAND Online displays lane recommendation B, based on the next two changes of
direction. The number of lanes applies to the
point at which the next change of direction is
required.
i The multifunction display also shows lane
recommendations.
Only the recommended lanes are displayed
here; see separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Example: lane recommendations
: Point of the next change of direction
; Point of the change of direction after next
= Direction display, number of junction and
of motorway
? Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
A Distance to the next change of direction
B Recommended lane (dark blue)
C Next change of direction (in this case, exit
to the right)
D Possible lanes (light blue)
Navigation
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
94
Route guidance
Display and description of lane recommendations
Navigation
Lane
Day
design
Night
design
Recommended lane Dark
In this lane, you will blue
be able to complete
the next two
changes of direction
without changing
lane.
Light
blue
Possible lane
Light
In this lane, you will blue
only be able to complete the next
change of direction
without changing
lane.
Dark
blue
Lane not recommended
In this lane, you will
not be able to complete the next
change of direction
without changing
lane.
During the change of direction, additional
lanes may appear. These are displayed differently.
Example: day design
: The displayed lane recommendations
apply to this position (light blue circle)
Light
Grey
brown or
light grey
Example: night design
i The colours used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether
day or night design is switched on.
Example: lane recommendations at a motorway
junction
: New lane (dark blue)
Observe the route guidance information
shown in the multifunction display, see the
separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Route guidance
Repeating navigation announcements
If you have missed an announcement, you can
call up the current announcement at any
time.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select + in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching navigation announcements
off/on
To switch off: press the 8 button during an announcement.
You will briefly see the message: The
guidance instructions have been
muted.
To switch on: press W the COMAND controller.
Select + in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i COMAND Online automatically switches
the navigation announcements back on
when:
receives RDS-TMC traffic reports during dynamic route guidance and recalculates the route accordingly
(Y page 103)
Ryou calculate a new route
Ryou switch COMAND Online on again or
start the engine
Switching announcements and audio
fadeout on/off
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Announcements and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
You can activate/deactivate the following
functions:
RAnnouncing
the street names
Street names are announced during
route guidance.
RAudible info during a phone call
During a phone call, navigation
announcements and traffic reports are
audible in the background.
RAudio fadeout
The volume of an active audio or video
source is automatically reduced during a
navigation announcement.
RReserve fuel indicator
Once you have reached reserve fuel
level, you will see a query asking whether
you wish to start the search for a filling
station (Y page 77).
X Select the function and press W to confirm.
Switch the function on O or off ª.
Rit
Setting the volume manually
Adjust the volume using the q control
knob during a navigation announcement.
or
Select + in the map view with the menu
shown and adjust the volume using the
q control knob.
Announcing the street names
If the function is switched on, the name of the
street into which you should turn is
announced.
Navigation
Navigation announcements
95
Route guidance
96
Navigation
Announcements are not made in the chosen
language in all countries. They are made when
relevant street names for the selected language are available in the database.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Announce street names and press
W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Street names may be announced in the following languages:
RDanish
RGerman
REnglish
RFrench
To cancel route guidance: select Cancel
route guidance and press W to confirm.
or
To continue route guidance: select Con‐
tinue route guidance and press W to
confirm.
COMAND Online calculates the route.
Destination or area of destination
reached
When you reach your destination, COMAND
Online displays a chequered flag and route
guidance is automatically ended.
If the destination is not in close proximity to
a digitised street, the Area of destina‐
tion reached message appears when the
destination is reached.
Influencing route guidance
Avoiding a section of the route blocked
by a traffic jam
RDutch
RPortuguese
RSwedish
Quitting route guidance
Cancelling or continuing route guidance
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
: Length of the blocked route section
; Name of route section
= Blocked route section
This function blocks a section of the route
ahead of you. You can set the length of the
blocked route section. If possible, COMAND
Online calculates a detour around the
blocked section of the route.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Route guidance
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Detour and press W to confirm.
X To block a section of the route: select
Longer or Shorter repeatedly and confirm
using W until the desired section has been
selected.
i The total length of the section that can be
blocked is defined by the digital map. The
menu items are available accordingly.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Alternative route and press W
to confirm.
Navigation
To delete the blocked section: select
Delete while the message is shown and
press W to confirm.
COMAND Online calculates the route without the block.
Selecting an alternative route
With the "Alternative route" function, routes
other than the original one can be calculated.
Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current
settings for the route type and route options
and are shown with a dark blue line
(Y page 64).
Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) and
is shown with a green line.
On the right-hand side, you will see information on the currently selected alternative
route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining
driving time and estimated time of arrival.
Route sections used (e.g. motorways, tunnels) are displayed as symbols.
Option 1
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
97
Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (eco
route)
Option 2
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Calculate alternative routes
and press W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Function is activated: alternative routes
are calculated directly after the destination
is entered.
Route guidance
98
Navigation
Menu functions
To select the next or previous alternative route: select Next or Previous and
press W to confirm.
To start route guidance using the selected alternative route: select Start and
press W to confirm.
COMAND Online begins route guidance on
the selected alternative route.
Route information
Displaying destination information
Example: destination information
The example shows information on distance,
estimated time of arrival and estimated
remaining driving time to the destination O
and two way points.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Destination information and
press W to confirm.
Destination information is displayed.
To call up further destination information: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
To close the destination information:
slide XVY the COMAND controller or press
the % back button.
i You can display destination information
for the destination, for both waypoints and
the intermediate stop, if they are part of the
route.
If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
Online and a phone number is included in
the destination information, you can call it
(Y page 132).
Route overview
You can use the route overview to move along
the active route section by section and view
information and details about each section of
the route.
You can see information relevant to the section of the route, such as the length of the
road section you will be driving along and the
road name. The highlighted route section is
marked in white with a red border on the map.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Route browser and press W to
confirm.
Route guidance
99
To view the next or previous route section: select Next or Previous and press
W to confirm.
i If the first or last route section is high-
To close the route overview: select
Back and press W to confirm.
Route demonstration
Example: route demonstration stopped
: Display of street name and city when
route demonstration is paused
; Distance of the crosshair from current
vehicle position
To get to the current vehicle position:
press W to confirm the symbol for the current vehicle position.
You can see the route before starting your
journey. This function is only available when
the vehicle is stationary.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Route demonstration and press
W to confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
To get to the destination: press W to
confirm the highlighted symbol.
To stop the route demonstration: confirm the Ë symbol by pressing W.
To change the map scale: select Scale
and press W to confirm.
The scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Recording the route
Notes
If you have activated COMAND Online and the
SD memory card has been inserted, you
should not take it out of the slot.
When you record a route, COMAND Online
uses so-called support points and displays
the route as a series of lines. If the route is
then calculated, COMAND Online attempts to
align the recorded route with the digital map.
The support points of the route may not be on
a digitised road.
Navigation
lighted, you cannot select Previous or
Next.
X To zoom in or out of the map: select N
or M and press W to confirm.
Route guidance
100
This is often the case with routes which are
drawn up using other map data and imported
via the online function, e.g.:
Starting/ending recording
Rroutes
from the Google™ Local Search
(Y page 180)
Rroutes from the destination/route download (Y page 185)
Navigation
Calling up the Routes menu
: To indicate recording has started (REC is
red)
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Call up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).
X To start recording: select Start record‐
ing in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The route is recorded and entered in a list.
#REC is displayed in red :.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Routes.
To end recording: select Stop record‐
ing in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Displaying and editing the recorded
route
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
Call up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).
X Select List in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
Route guidance
101
To change the route name: select
Rename and press W to confirm.
i The name cannot be changed while the
Select a route and press W to confirm.
The map appears with a menu. The recorded route is shown in the map with a blue
dotted line.
To view a demonstration of the route
on the map: select Demo by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
X Proceed as described in the "Route demonstration" section (Y page 99).
To begin route calculation: select Start
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online attempts to align the
recorded route with the digital map.
Please see further information on managing
categories for personal POIs (Y page 84).
To change direction for route calculation: you can set the icon for the route to the
starting point or to the destination, thereby
changing the direction for route calculation.
During route calculation, one-way streets or
turn restrictions, for example, are taken into
account. Therefore, the outward and return
routes may differ from each other.
X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
To delete a route: select Delete in the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the route
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the route will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Scanning the memory
Changing route names and icons
Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The SD memory card is inserted.
Navigation
vehicle is in motion.
X To change the icon: select Change icon
and press W to confirm.
Route guidance
102
Call up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).
Select Presets in the "Routes" menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The route memory is displayed.
Navigation
Off-road and off-map
Route guidance to a destination that is
not on a digitised road
Example: route guidance to an off-road destination
: Off-road destination
; Off-road route section (dashed blue)
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
COMAND Online can guide you to destinations which are within the area of the digital
map, but which are not themselves recorded
on the map.
These destinations are known as off-road
destinations, which you can enter using the
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND
Online guides you for as long as possible with
navigation announcements and displays on
roads known to the system.
Shortly before you reach the last known point
on the map, you will hear the "Area of destination reached" announcement. The display
shows a direction arrow with the linear distance to the destination.
Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination
If the vehicle position is within the area covered by the digital map, but the map does not
contain any information about that location,
the vehicle is in an off-road location.
COMAND Online is also able to guide you to
a destination even from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Street unknown message, an arrow and the
distance to the destination. The arrow shows
the compass heading to the actual destination.
The route is highlighted blue, starting from
the last recognised street the vehicle was on
before it left the map.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
Route guidance from an off-map location to a destination
If the vehicle position is outside the area covered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in
an off-map location. COMAND Online is also
able to guide you to a destination even from
an off-map location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Street unknown message, an arrow and the
distance to the destination. The direction
arrow shows the compass heading to the destination.
The route is highlighted blue from the nearest
road known to the system.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be
differences between the data on the digital
map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the
Dynamic route guidance
Dynamic route guidance
Introduction
Traffic reports via TMC
An RDS-TMC radio station transmits RDSTMC traffic reports in addition to the radio
programme. COMAND Online can receive
RDS-TMC traffic reports and take them into
consideration for dynamic (traffic-dependent) route guidance. The navigation system
can, for example, guide you around a traffic
jam.
In Germany, COMAND Online uses high-quality traffic data for the TMCpro traffic jam
warning system. In contrast to the public TMC
service, TMCPro uses exclusive traffic data
that is detected with an automated sensor
network, in addition to the messages generated by the TMC service. The traffic data
received from the traffic jam warning services
named above could differ.
There may also be differences between the
traffic reports received and the actual road
and traffic conditions.
The respective traffic data being received
appears at the bottom right of the display with
the symbols "TMCPro" or "TMC". If there is no
reception, no symbol is displayed.
Switching dynamic route guidance
on/off
If Dynamic route or Eco route is selected
as the route type, RDS-TMC traffic reports are
taken into account for route guidance.
The Fast route and Short route route
types do not take RDS-TMC traffic reports
into account for route guidance.
Selecting route type (Y page 64).
i COMAND Online calculates a new route if
you change the route type setting with
route guidance active. If you change the
route type setting when route guidance is
inactive, COMAND Online uses the new
setting for the next route guidance.
RDS-TMC displays on the map
Example: traffic reports on the map
i RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
RDS-TMC symbols
: Traffic jam on the route
; Slow-moving traffic on the route
= Road blocked
Navigation
digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an offroad position.
In the display, you will see the Street
unknown message, an arrow and the distance
to the destination. The direction arrow shows
the compass heading to the destination.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance
continues in the usual way.
103
Dynamic route guidance
104
? Road blocked
Traffic symbol information
A Slow-moving traffic (yellow line along the
affected route)
B Traffic jam (red line along the affected
route)
Navigation
i The display shows the entire affected
route section with the corresponding symbols, regardless of how long the incident
actually is. The symbols are placed on the
side of the carriageway affected by the incident.
COMAND Online can show certain traffic incidents on the map. The displays can be shown
in map scales of 50 m to 20 km.
X To set the map scale: turn cVd the
COMAND controller until the desired map
scale is set.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
Displaying RDS-TMC traffic reports
Starting a search for traffic reports
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. COMAND Online first
searches for RDS-TMC stations within
receiver range. If RDS-TMC stations are
found, a search for traffic reports is then
started.
If no RDS-TMC stations are found, or there
are no traffic reports, you will see a message to this effect.
To close the message: confirm OK by pressing W the COMAND controller.
Example display
: Affected section of motorway
; Symbol for incident (traffic jam in the
example shown)
= Symbol display for the section of route
affected
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Traffic symbol information
and press W to confirm.
To show the next/previous incident:
select Next or Previous (if available) and
press W to confirm.
X To show the detailed view: select
Details and press W to confirm.
X To scroll the map: select Map and press
W to confirm.
You can move the map to enable further
traffic reports to be displayed
(Y page 112).
Dynamic route guidance
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Messages on the route and press
W to confirm.
The traffic report is displayed. If there is
more than one traffic report for a section of
the route, this is indicated by 1/2, for
example.
To scroll within a report or to access
the next report: turn cVd the COMAND
controller.
To exit the report: slide XVY the
COMAND controller once or several times.
: Country designation, road number, direc-
tion and number/total number of reports
for the affected road (1/2)
; Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
= Traffic report
? Type of traffic report (warning)
Displaying all traffic reports
Example: list showing all currently available traffic
reports
: Traffic jam
; Slow-moving traffic
= Warning message
? Road blocked
A Construction site
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Display all messages and press
W to confirm.
A list is shown containing all roads, areas
or regions affected by traffic reports.
Roads, areas or regions not on the route
also appear in the list.
Navigation
Displaying reports on the route
105
Destination memory
106
Navigation
To show a traffic report: select a road, an
area or a region and press W to confirm.
The traffic report is displayed. If there is
more than one traffic report for a section of
the route, this is indicated by 1/2, for
example.
You can find an example of a traffic report
here: (Y page 105).
To exit the report: slide XVY the
COMAND controller once or several times.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Calling up traffic reports
The text reader function is only available
when route guidance is active.
You can select from the following text reader
properties:
RLanguage (Y
page 47)
reader speed (Y page 46)
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
RText
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
Briefly press the 8 button.
The function is deactivated immediately.
i COMAND Online interrupts the readaloud function automatically as it recalculates the route following a new RDS-TMC
traffic report.
Automatic read-aloud function
You can have TMC traffic reports on your
route read aloud automatically. Announcements are made as you approach traffic incidents.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X To switch the automatic read-aloud
function on/off: select TMC in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Read out all messages on
route and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online reads out the messages
in sequence.
i The Read out all messages on
route menu item has no function if there
are no reports relating to the route.
To cancel the read-aloud function: select
Cancel read-aloud function and press
W to confirm.
The current traffic report is read out to the
end and then the function is deactivated.
Select Read traffic messages auto‐
matically and press W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Destination memory
Home address (My address)
Entering the home address via address
entry
Proceed as described under "Adopting an
address book entry as a home address"
(Y page 107). Confirm My address by
pressing W.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: confirm New entry by pressing W.
X To change the home address: select
Change in the menu showing the home
address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm New entry by pressing W.
X In both cases, enter the home address as a
destination, e.g. as a town, street and
house number (Y page 66). Then, save the
home address (Y page 69).
Adopting an address book entry as a
home address
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar
: Entry containing data that can be used for
navigation
; To call up options
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory list
appears as a selection list.
Option 2: destination memory list as a
selection list
The My address entry is listed as the first
entry in the destination memory.
X Select My address by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If you have not yet entered any characters, My address is automatically highlighted in the selection list.
If no home address has been stored yet, you
can now assign an address book entry. If a
home address already exists, it is displayed
and you can alter it.
i If you select New entry, you are also
offered the option of entering the home
address for the first time. You can then
107
Navigation
Destination memory
Destination memory
108
save the home address without having to
start route guidance.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: select Assign to address book
entry and press W to confirm.
Select Home, Work or Not classified and
press W to confirm.
Navigation
To change the home address: select
Change and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign to address book entry
and press W to confirm.
i If you select New entry, you are also
offered the option of changing the home
address by entering an address. You can
then save the home address without having
to start route guidance.
Select Home, Work or Not classified and
press W to confirm.
In both cases, you will see the address book
either with the character bar or as a selection list.
Select the address book entry
(Y page 156).
X To select: press W the COMAND controller.
If there is no existing home address,
COMAND Online saves the entry. You will
see a message and then the address menu
with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically.
If a home address has already been stored,
you will see a prompt asking you whether
the My address entry should be overwritten.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online overwrites the destination. You will see a message and then the address menu with the
selected address. Start is highlighted
automatically.
If you select No, the list will appear again.
Selecting the home address for route
guidance
Proceed as described under "Selecting a
destination from the destination memory"
(Y page 71).
Save destination
General notes
This function also stores the destination in
the address book.
When the address book is full, no destinations
can be saved in the destination memory. You
must first delete address book entries
(Y page 156).
After destination entry
The destination has been entered and is
shown in the address entry menu
(Y page 65).
X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You can now select storing options
(Y page 109).
During route guidance
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Save destination and press W to
confirm.
You can now select storage options
(Y page 109).
From the list of previous destinations
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of previous destinations appears.
Select a destination by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The destination address is shown.
Select Save and press W to confirm.
You can now select storage options
(Y page 109).
Selecting storage options
Once you have chosen one of the following
options for storing a destination, you can
specify storage options:
destination entry (Y page 108)
route guidance (Y page 108)
RFrom the list of previous destinations
(Y page 72)
RAfter
RDuring
Example: saving a destination with a name
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
To save the destination with a name:
select Save with name and press W to
confirm.
Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W
to confirm.
The input menu appears with data fields
and the character bar.
Proceed as described under "Character
entry (navigation)" (Y page 36).
X Then select ¬ and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores the destination
under the name entered.
An address with complete address data that
is suitable for navigation can be assigned to
a pre-existing address book entry.
X To assign an address to an address
book entry: select Assign to address
book entry and press W to confirm.
Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W
to confirm.
You will see the address book either with
the character bar or as a selection list.
Select the address book entry
(Y page 156).
COMAND Online stores the data if the
address book entry selected does not yet
contain navigable address data.
If the selected address book entry already
contains navigable address data, a prompt
Storage options
To save the destination without a
name: select Save without name and
press W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores the destination in
the destination memory and uses the
address as the destination name.
109
Navigation
Destination memory
Last destinations
110
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite the existing data.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online stores
the data.
You can now start route guidance to this
address directly from the address book
(Y page 158).
Navigation
To save the destination as My address:
select Save as "My address" and press
W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores the destination in
the destination memory as My address. If
the selected address book entry already
contains address data that can be used for
navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite the
existing data.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
To save the destination as a personal
POI: insert the SD memory card
(Y page 217).
X Select Save as personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
POI on the SD memory card.
Deleting a destination or the home
address
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar: enter characters using the
character bar (Y page 37).
Option 2: destination memory list as
selection list: select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You see the address data of the selected
entry.
Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the destination.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online deletes
the destination. You will see a message to
this effect.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned to
an address book entry, COMAND Online
will also delete this data from there. If the
corresponding address book entry does
not contain any further data, such as telephone numbers, COMAND Online deletes
the entire address book entry.
Last destinations
Introduction
COMAND Online automatically stores the
previous destinations for which route calculation has been started. If the memory is full,
COMAND Online deletes the oldest destination. You can also save a destination from the
list of previous destinations in the destination
memory. It will be stored there permanently.
Map operation and map settings
Proceed as described in the "From the list
of previous destinations" section
(Y page 72).
Storing the vehicle position in the list
of previous destinations
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save vehicle position and press
W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores the current vehicle
position as a destination in the list of previous destinations.
Storing the crosshair position in the
list of previous destinations
A crosshair appears on the map if you have
moved the map manually (Y page 112). You
can store the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save crosshair position and
press W to confirm.
Deleting a previous destination
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of previous destinations appears.
X Select the desired destination and press
W to confirm.
The destination address appears.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Map operation and map settings
General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval
of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself.
Setting the map scale
: Currently set map scale expressed as a
number with unit, in this case 500 m
; Currently set map scale as indicated by
the needle on the scale bar
= New map scale
? Scale bar
Navigation
Storing a destination permanently in
the destination memory
111
Map operation and map settings
112
Unit of measurement : in the COMAND display depends on the selection made for the
instrument cluster; see the separate vehicle
Owner's Manual.
X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W.
coordinates display is switched on
(Y page 114).
Hiding the crosshair and centring the
map on the vehicle position or destination
Navigation
To call up the scale bar: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale
bar ? appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Moving the map
Showing the crosshair
Press the % back button twice.
The crosshair disappears and the map is
set to the vehicle position.
Centring the map on the vehicle's position
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Vehicle position map and press
W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown,
press the % back button.
This hides the crosshair.
Centring the map on the destination
position
Map with crosshair
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
? Map scale selected
To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W.
To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide
it again, the map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.
Display = may be the name of a street, for
example, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data. It shows the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair if the Geo-
This function requires that a route to a destination has been calculated. If the route has
waypoints and an intermediate stop, the map
can also be set to these positions.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Destination position map and
press W to confirm.
The crosshair is centred on the respective
destination.
Map operation and map settings
113
Map settings
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Map orientation
Example: map orientation
: Current map orientation (0 or ¤)
Possible map orientations:
North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up)
R¤ Orientation in direction of travel (the
map is displayed so that the direction of
travel is always up; the orange point of the
icon points north)
R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed so
that the direction of travel is always up; the
map projection reproduces the curvature
of the earth and the orange point of the icon
points north)
R¤ 3D map (the map is displayed so that
the heading is always up; from a scale of
1 km the map displays elevation; the
orange point of the icon points north).
R0
Map orientation menu
Setting the map orientation
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select Map orientation and press W to
confirm.
X Select North up, Heading up, Bird'seye view or 3-D map by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A # dot indicates the new setting.
Selecting POI symbols
Setting the POI symbol display
You can set the POIs you wish to have displayed as symbols on the map. POIs are, for
Navigation
Calling up the Map settings menu
Map operation and map settings
114
Navigation
example, filling stations, hotels, cinemas and
restaurants.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select POI symbols on map and press
W to confirm.
The following settings are possible:
RStandard
symbols
Symbol display determined by the factory
settings.
RPersonal symbols
You can determine the symbols yourself.
RNo symbols
The map does not show any symbols.
hidden ª. You can switch on the icon displays for more than one POI.
X To switch all personal symbols on/off:
select All and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
hidden ª.
If the function is switched on O, the individual POIs are greyed out and the previously selected settings remain unchanged.
If the function is switched off ª, you can
reselect the individual POIs. This indicates
the previous settings.
i The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all countries. However, not all POIs are available in
all countries. As a result, certain POI symbols may not be displayed on the map, even
if the symbol display is switched on.
X To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
Selecting map information
Select Standard symbols, Personal
symbols or No symbols.
If you select Personal symbols, the POI
list appears.
To switch the symbol display on/off:
select a POI by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
Map information in the display
During route guidance, you can have map
information displayed at the bottom edge of
the display.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
X Select Text information on map and
press W to confirm.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
Select Current street, Geo-coordi‐
nates or None and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller.
Map operation and map settings
115
While moving the map, you will see additional
data depending on the crosshair position if
the digital map supports this data. A street
name, for example, can be shown here
(Y page 112).
Compass view on the map
Navigation
Road display
: Road name or designation
Geo-coordinate display
: Current height above average sea level
(rounded to the nearest 10 m)
; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
= Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
There must be sufficient GPS reception for all
displays to be shown. If this is not the case,
the display will be greyed out. Height display : may vary from the actual value,
because the navigation system uses the GPS
signals for the calculation.
During the "Move map" function, you will see
the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position.
Height display : and number of satellites
used ? are not displayed.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select Compass on map and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Never, When off-road or When
route guidance inactive and press W
to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
Display switched off
: Current map orientation
Map operation and map settings
116
Navigation
Switching additional information on/
off
Example: motorway information
Example: topographic map
Switching the topographic map on/off
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select Topographic map and press W to
confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª.
The topographic map uses different colours
to depict elevation. The colour key generally
reflects the topography's dominant vegetation or the ground's perceived colour when
seen from the air, for example:
(grass) for lowland
brown (woodland) for hills
Rgrey (stone) and white (snow) for mountains.
Switching motorway information on/off
When driving on the motorway, you can see
the following information on the right of the
display:
Rthe
nearest filling stations
nearest rest areas, etc.
Rand their distance from the current vehicle
position
The entries show the number of the motorway and the motorway exits as well as their
distance from the current vehicle position.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Rthe
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select Motorway information and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Rgreen
Ryellow,
Example: city model
Switching town view on/off
When the city model is switched on, the map
shows buildings as 3D models.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select City (3D) and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª.
i The city model is only shown in the bird'seye view and 3D maps.
It is available for the 50 m and 100 m map
scales.
The data required for displaying buildings
is not available for all towns.
117
Navigation
Map operation and map settings
Example: intersecting roads on city routes/motorways
Showing/hiding intersecting roads
If route guidance is not active, intersecting
roads can be displayed at the upper edge of
the display.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The Map settings menu appears.
Select Next intersecting street and
press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª.
118
Map operation and map settings
Traffic Sign Assist
Navigation
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not
always able to correctly display speed limits
and overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs
always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display.
The system may be either functionally
impaired or temporarily unavailable if:
Rvisibility
is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog
or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low
in the sky
Rthere is dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the area of the camera
Rtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice,
snow)
Rthere is insufficient illumination of the traffic signs in the night
Rsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on
construction sites or in adjacent lanes)
Rthe information in the digital street map of
the navigation system is incorrect or out of
date
The display can also be updated without a
visible traffic sign if:
Rthe
vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway
exit or slip road)
Ra village or town boundary is passed which
is stored in the digital map
Rthe last traffic sign detected by the camera
has not been repeated
If a cancellation sign (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the cancellation
sign is displayed for five seconds. The applicable traffic regulation then appears in
COMAND Online.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign
(e.g. in wet conditions).
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
Rthe
regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the
available sources, no speed limit is displayed
in COMAND Online.
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum
speed permitted and overtaking restrictions
to the driver in COMAND Online. Traffic Sign
Assist detects traffic signs when a camera
system is attached behind the top of the
windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are
also used to determine the current speed
limit.
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle
is passed, the display of the speed limits and
overtaking restrictions is updated.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display : is shown in
COMAND Online.
Switching Traffic Sign Assist on/off
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Map operation and map settings
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Traffic signs on map and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª.
A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h
(80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h
(60 mph) with an unknown restriction.
Navigation
119
Display on the map in COMAND Online
Speed limits in wet conditions
: Maximum permitted speed
; Additional signs for wet conditions
A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h
(80 mph) applies in wet conditions and when
Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the
restriction must be observed.
Speed limit with overtaking restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h
(60 mph) : and an overtaking restriction ; apply.
Cancelling the overtaking restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h
(60 mph) : applies. The overtaking restriction has been cancelled ;. The traffic sign
for cancelling the overtaking restriction is displayed for five seconds.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
: Maximum permitted speed
; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles
for which the restriction in the additional
sign is relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
Additional settings
Navigation
120
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Avoid area and press W to confirm.
If you have not previously blocked an area,
a menu appears.
Cancelling the speed limit
No speed limit : applies here.
i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are
driving. In general it is not displayed either
on traffic signs or in COMAND Online.
Please take this into account when observing the maximum permitted speed.
Additional settings
Avoiding an area
General notes
COMAND Online enables you to avoid areas
you do not wish to drive through.
If you activate or deactivate a route block
while route guidance is active,
COMAND Online will calculate a new route. If
you activate or deactivate a route block while
route guidance is inactive, COMAND Online
will use the new setting for the next route
guidance.
i Motorways within blocked areas are
always included in the route calculation.
Defining an area for the first time
Calling up the area menu
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Using map, From memory or From
personal POIs and press W to confirm.
If you select Using map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
If you select From memory or From per‐
sonal POIs, either the destination memory or the list of categories for POIs
appears.
RDestination memory (Y page 71)
RList of categories for personal POIs
(Y page 86)
X Select the desired destination or personal
POI and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and press W to confirm.
The map appears.
Additional settings
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from
the map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
To apply a block: press W the COMAND
controller.
A red square appears on the map.
Select Avoid area and press W to confirm.
If you have already selected one or more
areas to avoid, a list of areas appears.
Navigation
The crosshair marks the centre of the area
that is to be avoided.
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
Example: list of areas
i Available positions in the list are named
Empty and are shown in grey.
To adjust the size of the square: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The square is enlarged or reduced.
To confirm the settings: press W.
The list appears. The previously selected
area to be avoided has been added and
activated.
You can define additional areas that you
would like to avoid (Y page 121).
Defining further areas
Calling up the list of areas
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
121
Select Avoid new area by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Using map, From memory or From
personal POIs and press W to confirm.
If you select Using map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
If you select From memory or From per‐
sonal POIs, either the destination memory or the list of categories for POIs
appears.
Additional settings
122
memory (Y page 71)
of categories for personal POIs
(Y page 86)
X Select the desired destination or personal
POI and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and press W to confirm.
The map appears.
RDestination
Select Display / Change and press W to
confirm.
The area to be avoided is indicated on the
map.
To change the location of the area: slide
XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
The area is moved on the map.
To adjust the size of the area: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The area is enlarged or reduced.
To confirm the change: press W the
COMAND controller.
The list appears and the change is entered.
Navigation
RList
Deleting a set area
: New area to be avoided, the size of which
can still be adjusted
; Area currently being avoided
To avoid a new area: call up the area menu
again (Y page 120).
The illustration shows an example with two
areas that are to be avoided.
Switching an avoided area on/off
Call up the area list (Y page 121).
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The avoided area is switched on O or off
ª depending on the previous status.
Displaying and changing an avoided
area
Call up the area list (Y page 121).
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Call up the area list (Y page 121).
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A query appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Compass function
In the compass view, you can see the current
direction of travel, the current height above
sea level and the co-ordinates of the vehicle
position, for example.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
X
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
Select Compass and press W to confirm.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Example: compass
: Current direction of travel
; Current elevation above average sea
level, rounded
Select Country information and press
W to confirm.
When the connection has been made, the
available country information appears.
X To return to navigation: press the %
button.
Showing the map data version
= Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
B Currently set steering angle of the front
wheels
i To display current elevation ;, the sys-
tem must be able to receive at least four
satellites. Steering angle B can be a maximum of 35° in both directions.
To show the map data menu: press W
the COMAND controller.
To exit the display: confirm Back by pressing W or press the % back button.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map version and press W to confirm.
The map data version number is shown.
Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
Country-specific information
You can call up information on the traffic conditions in the country you are currently driving
in via the COMAND Online Internet and online
function.
The availability of information is countrydependent. Information can include maximum speeds, driving with dipped-beam headlamps or legal alcohol limits, for example.
123
Navigation
Additional settings
124
Additional settings
Updating the digital map
Navigation
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as
conventional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation
system in conjunction with the most up-todate map software.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. You can have the digital map
updated there with a DVD, or you can update
it yourself.
In some countries, it is possible to update the
map data for COMAND Online free of charge
for a period of 3 years. Information on the
availability of this service for your vehicle can
be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. If the free update is not available in your country, please read the "Updating process" section.
Entitlement to the free update
For the first three years after your vehicle is
registered, you are entitled to all available
updates to the map software for
COMAND Online. They are usually installed
during a regular vehicle service. After this
period, you can purchase further updates
from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The free updates relate to the vehicle and not
to an individual. If there is a change of ownership within 3 years of first registration, the
new owner is entitled to the map software
updates.
software updates for your vehicle are available at your Mercedes-Benz partner.
Updating at the Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre
If an update for your map software is available, you will receive it free of charge at your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre during your
vehicle's annual service. You can arrange a
separate appointment for this at your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre on request.
The update can only be performed:
Rat
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
European navigation data
The map software is not provided on DVD.
Rfor
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Never run the engine in an enclosed space.
The exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbon
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes is hazardous to your health and can lead to loss of consciousness and death.
Carrying out the update yourself
i The update process may take some time
(over an hour), depending on the size of the
digital map. During this time, you will only
be able to switch on radio mode and to
accept incoming calls. The update will be
completed more quickly if the vehicle is
stationary.
If you start the update with the engine
switched off and the starter battery has
insufficient power, COMAND Online may
automatically switch off. This preserves the
battery. If this occurs, restart the update
with the engine running.
Availability of free updates
Enter your e-mail address at http://
www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/
comand-infomail. You will receive a one-off email containing information on how to update
the map software. Go to http://
www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/
navigation-updates also, to find out if map
Insert the DVD:
Additional settings
To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Take the DVD out of the slot.
The update is complete.
If the update is not successfully completed,
you will see a message that the map update
is not possible.
To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Take the DVD out of the slot.
Rin
Take the DVD out of the slot.
Insert the requested DVD.
Once the update has been successfully
completed, you will see a message to this
effect.
Navigation
the single DVD drive (Y page 215)
the DVD changer (Y page 215)
COMAND Online checks whether the digital map on the DVD is compatible with the
navigation system and system software.
A prompt then appears asking if you want
to install the database. Versions of the
database currently installed and the database that is to be installed are displayed.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes, an activation code
must be entered when installing a database
for the first time. You will receive the activation code when you buy the navigation
DVD.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
X Enter the activation code.
After entering the activation code correctly, COMAND Online starts updating the
digital map. Once the update is finished,
you will see a message.
X To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar.
The navigation system is not operational
until the update is complete.
i You cannot eject the DVD during the
update. If you switch off COMAND Online
during the update, the update is interrupted. It then continues from where it was
interrupted when the system is restarted.
COMAND Online may prompt you to change
the DVD during the update.
X Press the V (for DVD changer) or
8 (for single DVD drive) load/eject button.
Rin
125
126
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation
Problems with the navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND Online is
unable to continue
route guidance after
the journey has been
interrupted.
Route guidance is cancelled if you interrupt the journey for more
than two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND Online
back on and driving on.
X Continue route guidance (Y page 96).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND Online is
unable to determine
the vehicle's position.
COMAND Online has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if
the vehicle has been transported.
Examples:
Rafter
transporting the vehicle by ferry
transporting the vehicle by motorail
Rafter the vehicle has been towed
X Start the vehicle and pull away.
COMAND Online determines the vehicle's position. Depending
on the driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
Rafter
Problems with the navigation system
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND Online has an integrated hard drive on which the digital
The Navigation
unavailable message map is stored.
appears.
To protect the integrated hard drive against damage,
COMAND Online deactivates it at very high and low temperatures.
The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND Online cool down.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then on
again.
If an area of the hard disk has a fault, COMAND Online can no
longer access the map data in this area. This may occur when
calculating a route, for example.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then on
again.
The navigation system will be operational again until it has to
access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message
will then reappear.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You see a message
The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.
informing you that the X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller.
DVD containing the digital map is incompatible X Eject the DVD.
X Have the system database checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service
with the system softCentre.
ware.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The DVD is dirty.
X Clean the DVD.
Restart the update.
The DVD is scratched.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Navigation
Problem
127
128
Problems with the navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle
interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
Restart the update.
Navigation
COMAND Online's integrated hard disk is defective.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND Online asks The digital map is secured with an activation code.
for an activation code X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
during the map update.
129
Features of your COMAND Online ... 130
General notes .................................... 130
132
137
138
139
144
148
150
152
154
163
164
Telephone
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface ....................................................
Switching on and changing telephony operating modes ........................
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone operation .........................
Using the phone book ......................
Using call lists ...................................
Using the speed dial list ...................
Text messages (SMS) .......................
Using the address book ...................
Mercedes-Benz Contact ...................
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system ...............................................
130
General notes
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and to the
health of others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this risk by using
an exterior aerial.
Therefore, only use mobile communication
equipment if it is connected to the exterior
aerial of the vehicle.
Telephone
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Operating communications equipment integrated into the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could
then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in
an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if:
Rthe
RF transmitter is not connected to an
exterior aerial
Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is
not a low-reflection aerial
This can jeopardise the operating safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at
a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF
transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating mobile communications
equipment in the vehicle.
Introduction
COMAND Online allows you to use two different modes of telephony:
Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface
(standard equipment):
Rpermanently installed/SAP telephony (only
in conjunction with data-enabled MB SAP
module)
In telephony via Bluetooth® interface
mode, the mobile phone is connected directly
to COMAND Online via Bluetooth®.
Enhancing this operating mode with the
optional mobile phone bracket allows you to:
Rconnect
the mobile phone to the exterior
aerial on the vehicle
Rcharge the mobile phone
In the permanently installed/SAP telephony mode, the optional data-enabled MB
SAP module is inserted into the fitting in the
armrest designed for housing the mobile
phone bracket.
When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access
Profile), the contacts are automatically downloaded to COMAND Online.
If your mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile),
COMAND Online can receive and display text
messages.
General notes
Rsuitable
mobile phones
mobile phone brackets
Rconnecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones to COMAND Online
Roverview of the functions for the operating
modes
Ravailable
Disconnecting a call while the vehicle
is in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
Rthere is insufficient GSM network coverage
in certain areas
move from one GSM or UMTS transmitter/receiver area (GSM/UMTS cell) into
another and no channels are free
Ryou use a SIM card that is not compatible
with the network available
Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is logged into the network at
the same time
Ryou
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
Rusing
the COMAND controller:
turn cVd
slide XVY or ZVÆ
press W
Rusing the 6 or ~ button and using
the telephone keypad on COMAND Online
Rthe 6 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel
Rusing LINGUATRONIC (see the separate
LINGUATRONIC operating instructions)
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and
illustrations in this section refer to
COMAND Online.
Function restrictions
You will not be able to use the telephone, will
no longer be able to use the telephone, or you
may have to wait before using it in the following situations:
Rif
the mobile phone is switched off
the "Bluetooth®" function is switched off
in COMAND Online
Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on
the mobile phone while you are using Bluetooth® interface telephony
Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a
mobile phone network
Rif
i The telephone automatically tries to log
on to a network. If no network is available,
you may not be able to make a "999" or
"112" emergency call. If you attempt to
make an outgoing call, the No service
message will appear for a short while.
If you switch COMAND Online off during a call
in hands-free mode, the call will be terminated. You can prevent this as follows:
X Switch the mobile phone to private mode
before switching off COMAND Online (see
the mobile phone operating instructions).
"999" or "112" emergency call
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call:
Rthe
mobile phone must be switched on
network must be available
Ra valid and operational SIM card must be
inserted in the mobile phone
Rthe PIN must have been entered
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
must arrange rescue measures yourself.
Ra
i The 999 or 112 emergency call number
is a public service. Any misuse is punishable by law.
Telephone
Further information on the following topics
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or on the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect:
131
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
132
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
Conditions
For telephony via COMAND Online's Bluetooth® interface, a Bluetooth®-capable
mobile phone is required.
On COMAND Online
Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND Online (Y page 46).
Telephone
On the mobile phone
Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN when prompted to do so (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® functions and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the mobile
phone (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
The battery of the mobile phone should
always be kept sufficiently charged in order
to prevent malfunctions.
In preparation for telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface, you should check the following items on your mobile phone (see the
mobile phone operating instructions):
RHands-Free
Profile
The mobile phone must support HandsFree Profile 1.0 or above.
RBluetooth® visibility
On certain mobile phones, the device itself
must be made "visible" to other devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth® function
(see the mobile phone operating instructions).
This visibility is for restricted periods of
time on some mobile phones.
RBluetooth® device name
Every Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
device name. This device name is freely
definable, but can be identical for all devices from the same manufacturer. It is
therefore recommended that you change
this name so that you can easily recognise
your mobile phone (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
i Not all mobile phones available on the
market are equally suitable. Further information on suitable mobile phones and
mobile phone brackets can be obtained at
your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on
the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect.
i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Connecting a mobile phone
General notes
Before using your mobile phone with
COMAND Online for the first time, you will
need to:
for it (Y page 133) and then
(register) it (Y page 134).
Device-specific information on authorising
and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones can be found on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect.
When you authorise a new mobile phone, it is
connected automatically.
You can authorise up to 15 mobile phones.
If the mobile phone supports PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile), the following contacts and
messages are downloaded into COMAND
Online when connecting:
Rsearch
Rauthorise
Rthe
phone book
call lists
Rtext messages (SMS)
Further information on the conditions for connecting (Y page 132).
Rthe
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
Empty Bluetooth® telephones list
Select Search for phones and press the
W button to confirm.
A message appears.
X Select Start search and press the W
button to confirm.
The Searching for Bluetooth
phones... message appears. COMAND
Online looks for Bluetooth® telephones
within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® telephones list.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the
list with the Ï symbol.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® telephones within
range and their characteristics.
Symbols in the Bluetooth® phone list
Conditions for searching
Bluetooth® telephones list after the search has finished
Press the % function button on
COMAND Online.
X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Symbol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone in range, but
not yet authorised
Authorised mobile phone
Currently connected mobile
phone
Ñ
Mobile phone in range and
authorised
Ñ
(grey)
Mobile phone not in range, but
already authorised
The Bluetooth® telephones list shows all
mobile phones within range and all previously
authorised mobile phones, whether or not
they are in range.
i Mobile phones that are connected to the
optional data-enabled MB SAP module are
shown in a separate phone list. These can
be called up using the MB SAP module
entry. See the data-enabled MB SAP module's separate operating instructions.
i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already
full, you will be requested to de-authorise a
mobile phone (Y page 136). If COMAND
Telephone
Searching for a mobile phone
133
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
134
Online does not find your mobile phone,
external authorisation may be necessary
(Y page 135).
i When you call up the phone list again, deauthorised devices will be removed from
the list. In this case, start a new search to
update the Bluetooth® telephone list.
Authorising (registering) a mobile
phone
tooth®-capable mobile phone (see the mobile
phone operating instructions).
i Some mobile phones require a passcode
with four or more digits.
i If you want to re-authorise a mobile phone
following de-authorisation, you can select
a different passcode.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisation in COMAND Online and on the
mobile phone(Y page 136). Subsequent
authorisation may otherwise fail.
Telephone
To enter a passcode in COMAND
Online: press the number keys in turn.
or
Passcode entry
Select the digits in the digit bar one by one
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and pressing W to confirm.
¬is highlighted after the first number
has been entered.
In both cases, select ¬ and press W to
confirm.
Telephone basic menu
Option 1: using the passcode (access
number)
Select the mobile phone with the Ï
symbol from the Bluetooth® telephones list
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The input menu for the passcode appears.
The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. You must enter the same number combination in COMAND Online and in the Blue-
To enter the passcode on the mobile
phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is successful, you will be requested to enter the
passcode (access code, passkey; see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
X Enter the same passcode in the mobile
phone as the one already entered in
COMAND Online.
The Connecting Bluetooth pro‐
files... message appears.
The Authorisation successful message appears once authorisation is completed.
The mobile phone is authorised and connected to COMAND Online. You can now make
phone calls using the COMAND Online handsfree system.
i After entering the passcode, you may also
need to enter a confirmation in your mobile
phone in order to make calls. Please check
your mobile phone display. On some mobile
phones, this confirmation can be saved. In
this case, you do not need to enter it again.
If the COMAND Online display shows the
Authorisation failed. message, you
may have exceeded the prescribed time
period. Repeat the procedure.
Option 2: using Secure Simple Pairing
To connect via Secure Simple Pairing, the
mobile phone (or Bluetooth® audio equipment) must support Bluetooth® Version 2.1.
COMAND Online creates a six-digit code,
which is displayed on both devices that are to
be connected.
X If the code is the same on both devices,
confirm Yes by pressing W.
If you select Yes, authorisation is continued
and the mobile phone is connected.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
X Confirm the message on the mobile phone.
External authorisation
If COMAND Online does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone. In this
case, you can test if your mobile phone can
find COMAND Online. The Bluetooth® device
name of COMAND Online is "MB Bluetooth".
Please note the following: some mobile
phones require that you establish the connection to COMAND Online again once you
have entered the passcode (see the mobile
phone operating instructions). The mobile
phone cannot otherwise be authorised.
X Press the % function button on
COMAND Online.
X Select Connect device in the telephone
basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Bluetooth® telephones list appears.
X Select Search via telephone and press
W to confirm.
The message on the left appears.
Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile
phone; see the mobile phone operating
instructions.
X Select COMAND Online (MB Bluetooth)
on the mobile phone.
X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter
the passcode first on the mobile phone and
then in COMAND Online.
X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on
the mobile phone and in COMAND Online
(Secure Simple Pairing).
With both options, you see the prompt Do
you want to authorise  ? on the COMAND display.
X If you select Yes, the mobile phone will be
authorised. The messages Waiting for
 to be con‐
nected... and Connecting Bluetooth
profiles... are displayed. If the connection is successful, you see the telephone
basic menu and the connected mobile
phone is entered.
135
Telephone
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
136
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Reconnecting automatically
Telephone
COMAND Online always searches for the last
connected mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system
searches for the mobile phone that was connected before that one.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorised more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
X Select the mobile phone from the Bluetooth® phone list by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth®
range and if Bluetooth® is activated.
Only one mobile phone can be connected
at any one time. The currently connected
mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in
the Bluetooth® telephones list.
i You can only switch to another authorised
mobile phone if you are not currently making a call.
De-authorising (de-registering) a mobile
phone
Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisation in COMAND Online and on the mobile
phone. Subsequent authorisation may otherwise fail.
X Press the % function button on
COMAND Online.
X Select Connect device in the telephone
basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Bluetooth® telephones list
appears(Y page 133).
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears, asking whether you
really wish to de-authorise this device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® telephones list.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
i Before re-authorising the mobile phone,
you should also delete the device name MB
Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth® list.
Displaying connection details
Press the % function button on
COMAND Online.
X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Bluetooth® telephones list appears.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
Switching on and changing telephony operating modes
status (shown after a new
search)
Rauthorisation status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth®
interface)
Basic menu display
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface)
: Network provider's name (depends on the
connected phone)
Signal strength of mobile phone network
Ä
Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
To display call lists
Character bar
Bluetooth® name of the currently connected mobile phone
To display the COMAND phone book
Press the % function button.
The telephone basic menu appears when
the connected mobile phone is ready for
use.
i Displays : and ; are shown, depending
on the mobile phone connected.
Bars ; show the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network. If all bars are
filled, you have optimum reception.
If there are no bars, there is very poor
reception or none at all.
The receiver symbol shows whether a call
is active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
Displaying text messages in the telephone basic menu
The SMS menu item is only available if the
Bluetooth® phone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile). The
downloading of text messages from the Bluetooth® phone must have been completed.
The menu item is otherwise greyed out. Further information on text messages
(Y page 152).
If you have an unread text message, the 1
mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message.
The ú mail symbol is displayed as soon as
the text message memory is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
Switching on and changing telephony
operating modes
Overview
If your vehicle is equipped with convenience
telephony, COMAND Online starts the telephony mode depending on whether a telephone
module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) is inserted in the fitting or not.
If neither a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) nor a mobile phone
bracket is inserted, COMAND Online immediately starts the telephony via the Bluetooth® interface.
Activating with inserted telephone
module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)
If a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
profile) is inserted, COMAND Online starts
the SAP telephony.
i If no telephone module with Bluetooth®
(SAP profile) is inserted, COMAND Online
Telephone
Ravailability
137
138
Reception and transmission volume
checks whether a mobile phone bracket is
inserted and, if so, which type.
i Before using your telephone module with
Telephone
Bluetooth® (SAP profile) for the first time,
you need to set it up so that it will be recognised by COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions of the dataenabled telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile).
If no mobile phone is connected to the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile),
the Ready for Bluetooth telephony...
message appears. Approximately two
minutes after switching on COMAND Online,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to switch to Bluetooth® telephony.
If you confirm by selecting Yes, the Ready
for Bluetooth telephony... message
will appear. COMAND Online will search for
the two mobile phones last connected via the
Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile
phones is found, the telephone basic menu
for Bluetooth® telephony appears
(Y page 137). If neither of the mobile phones
is found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐
ephony... message remains in the display.
You can now connect your mobile phone
(Y page 132).
If you choose No, the Ready for SAP con‐
nectivity... message reappears.
Activating without a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)
Bluetooth® telephony is started
COMAND Online starts telephony via the
Bluetooth® interface and searches for the last
two mobile phones to have been connected
via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two
mobile phones is found, the telephone basic
menu for Bluetooth® telephony appears
(Y page 137). If neither of the mobile phones
is found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐
ephony... message remains in the display.
You now have to connect your mobile phone
(Y page 132).
i If you do not connect another mobile
phone via the phone list, the Bluetooth®
connection with the mobile phone remains
active until the next time COMAND Online
is switched off. While the Bluetooth® connection is active, only the Bluetooth® interface functions are available to you.
Switching between modes of telephony
If your vehicle is equipped with an optional
data-enabled telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile), you can switch the telephony mode.
You can change the mode of telephony in the
Bluetooth® phone list by selecting either a
Bluetooth® telephone or an SAP telephone.
X To call up the phone list (Y page 133).
X To select the mobile phone with the controller: turn and press the controller.
i SAP telephony: mobile phones which are
connected to an optional data-enabled
telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
profile) are shown in the telephone list
under the title Telephones of the SAP
module. By selecting an SAP telephone,
you change to SAP telephony.
Reception and transmission volume
Once the mobile phone has been authorised,
you can optimise the transmission and reception volume settings. To find out about the
best possible settings for your mobile phone,
contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or
visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect.
Telephone operation
139
Telephone operation
Incoming calls
Accepting a call
Press the % function button.
X Select Connect device in the telephone
basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select an authorised mobile phone from
the list by turning cVd.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Reception volume or Transmis‐
sion volume and press W to confirm.
X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To close the setting scale: press W or
slide XVY.
i Incorrect settings may have an impact on
the quality of calls.
Example: incoming call
To accept: confirm Accept by pressing
W.
or
Press the 6 button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
i You can also accept the call by voice command using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions).
Once you have accepted the call, you can use
hands-free mode.
The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 30).
Other functions during a call (Y page 141)
If the phone number of the caller is transferred, it appears in the display.
If there is an entry for the caller in the phone
book, you will also see the name.
If the phone number is not transferred or the
"Hide data" function is activated, Unknown
appears in the display.
i You can also accept a call as described
above when another main function is
switched on in COMAND. Once you have
accepted the call, the display switches to
telephone mode. After the call is finished,
you see the display of the previous main
function again.
Telephone
Telephone operation
140
The display does not switch to the telephone display if you:
Rpress
the % back button next to the
COMAND controller and then
Raccept the call using the 6 button on
the multifunction steering wheel
Rejecting a call
Telephone
To reject: select Reject by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
or
Using the number keypad
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Enter the digits using the number keypad.
To connect the call: press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel.
Using the telephone basic menu
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Select the digits one by one by turning
cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To make a call: select ° in the character
bar and press W to confirm.
or
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Select ° in the character bar and press
W to confirm.
or
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
press the 6 button on COMAND Online.
In both cases, the calls dialled list appears.
The most recently dialled number is at the
top.
Press the ~ button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
Making a call
Redialling
Press the 6 button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND
controller.
X To connect the call: press W the
COMAND controller.
For redialling using the multifunction steering
wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Using the call list or COMAND phone
book
Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 148).
or
Call up the COMAND phone book and
select an entry (Y page 145).
To make a call: press W the COMAND
controller or the 6 button.
Select and place a call using the multifunction
steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Using speed dial presets to make a call
The speed dial list contains stored entries
from the phone book (Y page 150).
Option 1:
Press one of the number keys for longer
than two seconds.
The telephone basic menu displays the
selected entry. This initiates dialling.
Telephone operation
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Speed dial preset list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
X Select the preset and press W to confirm.
The telephone basic menu displays the
selected entry. This initiates dialling.
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
To switch off: select Mike off and press
W to confirm.
If the microphone is switched off, the display shows the Q icon, and the The
microphone is off message appears for
a short period.
X To switch on: select Mike on and press
W to confirm.
The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly
see the The microphone is on message.
Sending DTMF tones
Functions available during a call
Overview
Telephone operation with a single call
: Person you are calling
; Icon for active telephone connection
= To switch the hands-free microphone off/
on (Y page 141)
? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones) (Y page 141)
A To end the call
Switching the hands-free microphone
on/off
This function is also available during an active
phone call.
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote
query functions.
X If you would like to listen to the messages
on your answering machine, for example,
select the corresponding number.
To transmit individual characters: once
a connection has been established to the
answering machine, select the desired
characters in the character bar, pressing
W to confirm each of them.
or
Press the corresponding key on the
COMAND Online number keypad.
Every character selected will be transmitted immediately.
Telephone
Option 2:
141
Telephone operation
142
To send a phone book entry as a DTMF
sequence: select Name by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select the desired phone book entry and
press W to confirm.
The entry is sent as a DTMF character
string.
To return to the call display: select
Back and press W to confirm.
Telephone
i DTMF tones can also be transmitted using
LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions.
Calls with several participants
Rejecting or accepting a waiting call
The mobile phone network provider must support and activate the call-waiting function.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the
system behaviour differs when accepting a
call.
If you have a call in progress and receive
another call, a new window appears in the
display. You also hear a tone. You can accept
or reject the call.
X To reject: select Reject and press W to
confirm.
or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
X To accept: select Accept and press W to
confirm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
The system behaviour after accepting the
incoming call depends on your mobile phone.
RThe mobile phone supports the call waiting
function (via Bluetooth®) when:
the previously active call is held. You can
then switch back and forth between both
calls (call waiting) (Y page 143).
RThe mobile phone does not support the call
waiting function (via Bluetooth®) when:
the previously active call is ended.
This is also the case if you accept the waiting call using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions).
Valid in both cases: if you accept the waiting
call using the mobile phone, the active call is
put on hold. You then have two calls. The call
you have just accepted is active.
The COMAND display changes. If you continue to operate functions on the mobile
phone, the COMAND Online display may differ from that of the mobile phone.
Making a second call
If the following requirements are met, you can
make another call while on the phone with
someone else:
Rthe
mobile network must permit this function.
Rthe mobile phone must allow you to make
a second call via Bluetooth®. This action
puts the previous call on hold if the mobile
phone supports this function.
Rthe corresponding setting must be activated on the mobile phone.
: Symbol for making a second call
Telephone operation
Select symbol : by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To switch between the active call and the call
on hold (call waiting):
Press the 6 button on COMAND Online.
or
Enter the phone number:
Rmanually (Y page 140)
Rusing the phone book (Y page 145)
Rusing the call lists (Y page 148)
Rusing speed dial (Y page 140)
Press the 6 button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
The previous call on hold is activated.
To end the active call: select ¢ in the
telephone basic menu and press W to confirm.
or
Call waiting and conference calls
You can switch back and forth between two
calls with the call waiting function. The function is available if your mobile phone supports
the toggling function (via Bluetooth®).
You can interconnect various callers to create
a conference call with the Conference function.
You can use the function if you are answering
a second call or making a second call while
talking to someone else.
Select call on hold ; and press W to confirm.
or
Press the ~ button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
The call on hold is active.
To interconnect the call on hold and the active
call to create a conference call:
Select Conference and press W to confirm.
To call other participants:
: Active call
; Call on hold
= Interconnects the call on hold and the
Select symbol : and press W to confirm.
You can now switch between the new participant and the conference call or add the
participant to the conference call.
active call to create a conference call.
Telephone
143
Using the phone book
144
The phone book of the mobile phone is automatically downloaded to COMAND Online
after connection.
In the telephone book, you can:
phone numbers (Y page 147)
for entries (Y page 145)
Rdelete entries (Y page 146)
Rimport contacts (Y page 160)
Rdelete contacts (Y page 161)
Rreceive vCards (Y page 161)
Rsave
Telephone
Rsearch
Switching between a new participant and the
conference call:
i The stored phone book and the vCards
remain in COMAND Online even if you use
COMAND Online with another mobile
phone. The entries can be viewed without
a mobile phone. For this reason, you should
delete any phone book entries before handing over or selling the vehicle.
Select Conference call and press W to
confirm.
You will change to a conference call. The
new participant is placed on hold.
Adding a new participant to the conference
call:
Select Conference and press W to confirm.
Calling up the phone book
Opening the phone book
Transferring a call
If you want to continue a call in private mode,
you will need to carry out the necessary steps
on the mobile phone.
See the mobile phone operating instructions
for further information.
Using the phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the names and
phone numbers of all address book entries
saved in the COMAND address book. If an
address book entry does not have a telephone number, it does not appear in the
phone book.
In addition, MB Contact is listed as the first
entry. This allows you to place a call to the
Mercedes-Benz Service hotline
(Y page 163).
Press the % function button.
Select Name in the telephone basic menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
If the phone book contains entries, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order. The
character bar at the bottom of the display
is active.
The character bar is used for fast selection
of an entry.
Enter the character using the character bar
(Y page 34).
Using the phone book
with the multifunction steering wheel, see
the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
To close the phone book
Select the & symbol in the main function
bar by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Searching for a phone book entry
Searching with the character bar
You determine the first letter of the entry you
are looking for with the first character you
enter.
or
Press the % back button.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Use the = or ; button to select the
Tel menu.
X Use 9, : or 9 to call up the phone
book.
Symbol overview
Sym- Explanation
bol
Æ
Address book entry that has been
entered or changed via COMAND
Online
Imported contact that has been
saved in the phone or address book
Address book entry with voice tag
These entries have also been
assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are
available in vehicles with LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions).
Ã
Contact imported from a mobile
phone that supports PBAP
¯
Entry which has been imported
from the SD memory card or USB
device
®
Entry imported via the Bluetooth®
interface
Select a character by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The first entry in the list that starts with the
letter selected is highlighted. If there are
similar entries, the next different character
is shown. For example, with entries such as
Christel and Christine, the beginnings
of the names are similar. In this case, you
will be offered a choice between E and I.
Select the characters of the entry you are
searching for one by one and press W to
confirm.
When the selection is clear,
COMAND Online switches automatically to
the selection list.
X To complete the search: slide VZ the
COMAND controller repeatedly or press
and hold W until the character bar disappears.
The selection list appears.
Information about character entry
(Y page 34)
Searching with the number keypad
You determine the first letter of the entry you
are looking for with the first character you
enter.
Press the corresponding number keys in
rapid succession.
More information on entering characters
using the number keypad (direct entry)
(Y page 37).
Directly from the list
You can switch to the list at any time during
character entry.
Telephone
i You can also call up the telephone book
145
Using the phone book
146
Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and hold W until the character bar disappears.
or
Select¬and press W to confirm.
To select an entry: turn cVd the
COMAND controller until the desired entry
is highlighted and press W to confirm.
Telephone
To select a phone number: the G symbol
indicates that an entry contains more than
one phone number.
Select a phone book entry with the G symbol and press W to confirm.
The sub-entries appear. The G symbol
changes to I.
Displaying the details of an entry
Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
To close the detailed display: slide
XVY repeatedly until the entry is highlighted again.
or
Press the % back button.
Deleting an entry from the phone
book
Phone book entry with several entries
Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and
press W to confirm.
To return to the phone book using the
character bar: select & in the list and
press W to confirm.
If the entry contains only phone numbers, it
is deleted from the phone book and address
book.
If it contains additional data, such as a navigable destination, the entry is deleted in the
phone book. However, the entry is retained in
the address book.
X Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted in
accordance with the rules described above.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
or
Press the % back button.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Select a number from the telephone book;
see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Using the phone book
147
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is created in the phone book and
in the address book.
Creating a new entry in the phone
book
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly in the phone book until the selection
list appears.
X Select the list symbol on the right in the
selection list by sliding VY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select New entry and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
The input menu with data fields appears.
You can add telephone numbers to an existing phone book entry.
X Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online stores the data if there are
fewer than five numbers assigned to the
entry you are searching for in the selected
number category.
If five numbers are stored for the entry in
the selected number category, a prompt
will appear. You can then choose whether
to overwrite one of the existing numbers.
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Enter characters (Y page 34)
To save an entry: select the¬symbol
in the character bar by turning cVd the
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list will appear
containing the five existing numbers.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
X Select the number to be overwritten by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
An input menu appears. The data field for
entering the new phone number is highlighted.
Enter characters (Y page 34)
Store an entry (Y page 35)
Telephone
Adding to a phone book entry
148
Using call lists
Using call lists
Telephone
Introduction
While the telephone is being used,
COMAND Online stores individual lists for
both incoming and outgoing calls (including
missed calls). Call lists are not available
unless a mobile phone is connected to
COMAND Online.
COMAND Online supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile. For this reason, note that the
system behaviour differs, especially when telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface:
with PBAP Bluetooth® profile
The call lists are downloaded automatically
from the mobile phone by
COMAND Online as soon as the mobile
phone is connected to COMAND Online.
RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Bluetooth® profile:
The call lists are created and displayed by
COMAND Online.
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
Press the % function button.
Select Call lists in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Rphone
i For Bluetooth® telephones without the
PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists in
COMAND Online are not synchronised with
those on your mobile phone. These calls
may or may not be listed on your mobile
phone, depending on the model.
Example: list of selected phone numbers
: To close the list
; Date/time (if available), symbols (if
assigned) and telephone number of the
entry highlighted
= To call up options
i If no mobile phone is connected, then the
Call lists menu item is greyed out and
cannot be selected. If you connect a mobile
phone other than the previous one to
COMAND Online, the previously available
call lists and their entries will be deleted
automatically. These are still available on
the mobile phone itself.
i You will only be able to select the respective menu items once calls have been
received or dialled from COMAND Online.
Displaying missed calls in the COMAND
display is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Select Incoming calls or Calls dial‐
led by turning cVd and press W to confirm.
The corresponding list appears.
i You can also call up the list of dialled calls
by pressing the 6 button when the telephone basic menu is shown. In this case,
the list will only show phone numbers.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To dial a phone number: press W.
To close the list: select the & symbol
and press W to confirm.
or
Press the % back button.
Displaying details from a list entry
COMAND Online can also show a shortened
list entry in full.
X Select a list entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Phone category
Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not classified
Landline
¬
Mobile
Ï
Car
´
Select Save and press W to confirm.
An input menu with data fields is shown.
The data field for the telephone number is
filled in automatically.
Storing a phone number
New address book entry
For incoming calls from a person who is not
in the address book, COMAND Online displays the phone number in the call list. You
can save this entry.
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 148).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
X Select New entry and press W to confirm.
Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Number category
Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not classified
No symbol
Home
¸
Work
·
: Data field with cursor
; Telephone number and symbol for the
phone category are automatically entered
= Character bar
Adding information to an address book
entry
For incoming calls from a person who is not
in the address book, COMAND Online displays the phone number in the call list. You
can save this entry.
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 148).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
149
Telephone
Using call lists
Using the speed dial list
150
i Save is shown in grey if the selected list
entry has already been saved.
Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
Telephone
Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
X Select Save.
The search menu for address book entries
appears.
X Search for the desired entry (Y page 145).
Press W when you have finished searching.
COMAND Online stores the data if there are
fewer than five numbers assigned to the
entry you are searching for in the selected
number category.
You will see a message to this effect.
If five numbers are stored for the entry you
are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of
the existing numbers.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list with the
five existing numbers is displayed.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
X Select the number to be overwritten in the
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online overwrites the selected
number with the new data.
Deleting call lists
If you are using a Bluetooth® phone that does
not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the
call lists are generated and managed by
COMAND Online. You can delete these call
lists in COMAND Online.
If you download call lists from a Bluetooth®
phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth®
profile, you cannot delete them from
COMAND Online.
X Select Call lists in the telephone basic
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete call lists and press W
to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete all call lists.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
i If you delete these call lists from the
mobile phone (see the separate mobile
phone operating instructions),
COMAND Online updates the call list display the next time it connects.
Using the speed dial list
Storing an entry
You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 to 9)
in the speed dial list. There are two options
available for this purpose.
Option 1:
Search for a phone book entry in the phone
book (Y page 145).
X If an entry has several phone numbers,
select the desired number by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Speed dial by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Using the speed dial list
151
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign speed dial preset and
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry appears at the top. The
next free speed dial preset is highlighted.
Speed dial menu
Select Assign speed dial preset and
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry appears at the top. The
next free speed dial preset is highlighted.
Telephone
Select the speed dial preset by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The phone book entry is saved in the speed
dial preset.
Option 2
Using speed dial presets to make a
call
The speed dial list contains stored phone
book entries (Y page 150).
Option 1:
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Speed dial preset list and
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
Select the speed dial preset by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The phone book entry is saved in the speed
dial preset.
Press one of the number keys for longer
than two seconds.
The telephone basic menu displays the
selected entry. This initiates dialling.
Option 2:
Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 137).
X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
Text messages (SMS)
152
Select Speed dial preset list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
X Select the preset and press W to confirm.
The telephone basic menu displays the
selected entry. This initiates dialling.
Deleting a speed dial preset
Telephone
To delete a speed dial number: select
Delete speed dial preset in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The speed dial preset is deleted.
To delete all speed dial numbers: select
Delete all speed dial presets in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will be asked if you would like to continue.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, all speed dial presets will
be deleted from the speed dial list.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
appears in the status bar. The symbol is no
longer displayed once you have read the text
message. The ú mail symbol is displayed
if the text message memory is full. The symbol
is no longer displayed once you delete at least
one text message.
i For telephony via a data-enabled MB SAP
module; see the data-enabled MB SAP
module's separate operating instructions.
i COMAND Online may not load all of the
most recent text messages:
This may occur in exceptional cases, for
example when using certain mobile
phones/brackets and if the mobile phone
inbox holds a large number of text messages.
i You can obtain further information about
suitable mobile phones from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the
Internet at http:// www.mercedesbenz.com/connect.
Displaying the text message (SMS)
inbox
Calling up the inbox
Text messages (SMS)
Information and requirements
In order to be able to use the text message
function, the mobile phone has to support
Bluetooth® Profile MAP (Message Access
Profile).
When the mobile phone is connected, the 30
most recent text messages that are currently
stored on the phone are loaded to the
COMAND Online text message inbox and displayed.
If the above conditions are met, new incoming
text messages appear in the COMAND Online
text message inbox. The / symbol
Text message (SMS) inbox
Press the % function button.
Select SMS in the telephone basic menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The text message inbox appears.
Text messages (SMS)
Calling up the text message (SMS) inbox
(Y page 152)
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The text message appears.
X To scroll through the display or select
phone numbers in a text message: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The display scrolls up or down line by line,
or skips to the next or previous telephone
number and automatically highlights it.
X To return to the list: select the & symbol and press W to confirm or press the
% back button.
Text message read-aloud function
Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X To switch to the text display: select the
list symbol to the right of the text message
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display text and press W to confirm.
The view changes.
X To switch to the sender display: select
the list symbol to the right of the text message by sliding VY the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Display sender and press W to
confirm.
The view changes.
Settings for the read-aloud function:
Rlanguage (Y
page 47)
page 46)
X Press W while a text message is being displayed, select Read aloud and press W to
confirm.
COMAND Online reads out the text message.
Rspeed (Y
To cancel the read-aloud function: press
the 8 button.
or
Press W, select Cancel read-aloud
function and press W to confirm.
Sender or text display
You can switch between displaying the text
message sender or the text message content.
The sender display shows the sender of the
text message. If the sender is stored in the
COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.
The text display shows the first few words of
a text message.
To return to the telephone basic menu:
press the % button.
Displaying details and phone numbers
COMAND Online can also show a shortened
sender display in full.
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
X To close the detailed display: slide
XVY the COMAND controller.
To return to the telephone basic menu:
press the % button.
Telephone
Reading a text message (SMS)
153
Using the address book
154
Managing text messages (SMS)
Calling a text message (SMS) sender
Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Call sender and press W to confirm.
The telephone makes the call to the sender.
Telephone
Using phone numbers in the text
Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Save number and press W to confirm.
X Select New entry and press W to confirm.
X Storing a phone number (Y page 149)
Adding the sender of a text message to
an address book entry
Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Save number and press W to confirm.
X Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
X Proceed from the step "Selecting a number
category" (Y page 147).
Deleting a text message (SMS)
sequence may not contain a telephone
number.
Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the text message is
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no."
i This delete function is not supported by
: Usable numerical sequence
Numbers in text messages that are highlighted in red can be used.
X Select a usable number when the text message is displayed.
Press W the COMAND controller and
select Use.
X Select Call.
The telephone makes the call.
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical
functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry.
Storing the sender of a text message in
the address book
This function is not available if the sender’s
telephone number is already stored in the
address book.
all mobile phones. The Delete failed
message appears.
Using the address book
Introduction
The address book organises and stores
entries that are entered from different sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB device,
Using the address book
i Number of contacts in the address
book: the address book can store a total of
4,000 contacts.
1,500 entries each are reserved in the
address book for:
Rcontacts
from the mobile phone
Rcontacts that you create in
COMAND Online or import from other
sources.
The remaining 1,000 entries are assigned
by COMAND Online as necessary.
i Display of mobile phone contacts: con-
tacts downloaded from the mobile phone
remain in the address book even if you disconnect the mobile phone
from COMAND Online. Contacts that have
previously been available can be displayed
as soon as the mobile phone is reconnected. COMAND Online downloads the contacts again so that any new contacts that
have been added to the mobile phone can
be displayed.
As soon as you connect a new mobile
phone to COMAND Online all the contacts
from the previous mobile phone are
replaced by those from the new phone's
address book.
Address book entries remain stored if the
mobile phone is disconnected. For this reason, delete your personal data using the
reset function before selling your vehicle,
for example (Y page 49).
Calling up the address book
Using the function button:
Press the % function button.
You see either the telephone basic menu or
the address book, depending on which was
last active.
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
press the % function button again.
Using the telephone basic menu:
When the telephone basic menu is displayed select Tel by sliding VZ the
COMAND Controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Address book from the menu and
press W to confirm.
Address book with ¥ address book entry and L
navigable data
To browse in the address book: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
X To close the address book: press the
% button.
i An address book entry can contain the
following information:
Rsurname
Rfirst
name
Rcompany
Rtwo
addresses
Rgeo-coordinates
Rup
to five telephone numbers
Telephone
COMAND telephone book, navigation system).
You can use these entries to make telephone
calls and to navigate.
155
Using the address book
156
Telephone
Searching for an address book entry
Search menu with character bar
: ¥ Address book entry
; L Complete address data from the nav-
igation system
Input menu with data fields
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Enter the characters (Y page 34)
Save the entry (Y page 35)
= Character bar
? d Phone book entry on the mobile phone
A Entry with voice tag
For more symbols, see the symbol overview
(Y page 145)
X Find entry (Y page 145)
Creating a new entry in the address
book
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone numbers in the COMAND phone book, these are
also saved in the address book. If you store a
navigation destination, COMAND Online creates an address book entry which includes
the complete navigable address data.
X Calling up the address book (Y page 155)
Select New in the address book by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu with data fields appears.
Deleting an address book entry
Option 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Option 2: search for an address book entry
(Y page 145).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt
will appear.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Using the address book
Displaying details for an address book
entry
Selecting an entry
157
Showing the details of an address book
entry
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The display is shown in full.
To close the detailed display: press the
% back button.
Detailed display of address book
: To go back to the previous menu
; \ Business details
= List symbol (to call up options)
Search for an address book entry
(Y page 145)
X Make selection in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
or
X Call up the address book (Y page 155)
X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The detailed display appears.
Starting route guidance to an address
Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The route to the destination address is calculated and route guidance starts
(Y page 68).
Calling a telephone number
Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
This initiates dialling and you can then
make your call (Y page 141).
Option 1: search for an address book entry
(Y page 145).
X Select in the selection list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Edit and press W to confirm.
Option 2: call up the detailed view for an
address book entry (Y page 157).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
In both cases, the input menu containing
data fields appears.
Information about character entry
(Y page 34)
Telephone
Changing an address book entry
Using the address book
158
Changing the category of a telephone
number data field
Telephone
Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 157).
X Select the telephone number data field.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Change category and press W to
confirm.
X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile.
X If desired, select Preferred and press W
to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
the option on O or off ª. The phone number is displayed as the first number in the
phone book and can be dialled immediately.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
The new category is stored.
Press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
X Select Call and press W to confirm.
The telephone makes the call. The display
switches to telephone mode.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 157).
X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Speed dial and press W to confirm.
You can now store the number in one of the
ten speed dial presets (Y page 150).
Starting route guidance to an entry
Calling a number stored in an entry
Conditions
The mobile phone must be connected via the
Bluetooth® interface (Y page 132).
Dials a number
Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 157).
X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
or
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller.
Address book entry with navigable data
This function is available as soon as you have
stored a destination in the destination memory (Y page 108).
X Search for an address book entry with the
L symbol and select it from the list
(Y page 156).
Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 157).
X Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Route guidance begins.
or
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Navigate and press W to confirm.
Route guidance begins.
Using the address book
Route guidance can also be started for an
address book entry without the L symbol. If
the address data or designations do not
match the digital map, COMAND Online
prompts you to re-enter the address.
X Enter the destination address (Y page 65)
X Start route guidance
The navigable address is added to the
address book entry automatically.
i This will provide you with an address book
entry that is suitable for navigation. Once
you have altered the address data in the
address entry menu, the altered address in
the navigation system will be used the next
time the system is started instead of the
postal address. Therefore always ensure
that the destination address is indeed the
required destination when navigation
starts from the address book.
Voice tags
Introduction
You can enter voice tags via LINGUATRONIC
(see the separate operating instructions).
Once you have assigned a voice tag to an
address book entry, you can vocally call up
this entry and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address
book entry.
Adding or changing a voice tag
Search for an address book entry with or
without a voice tag (¦) (Y page 156).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Add or Change and press W to confirm.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
LINGUATRONIC guides you through the
dialogues.
Deleting a voice tag
Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 156).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button
to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online deletes
the voice tag.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Listening to a voice tag
Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 156).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Listen and press W to confirm.
You hear the voice tag.
Importing phone book entries
This function allows you to store phone book
entries from the mobile phone in the address
book.
Possible sources are:
Rthe
Rthe
mobile phone
memory card
Telephone
Address book entry without navigable
data
159
160
Using the address book
Rthe
USB device
Bluetooth® interface
Imported phone book entries are indicated in
the phone book by different symbols
(Y page 145).
X Search for an entry in the phone book on
the mobile phone d(Y page 145).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save entry and press W to confirm.
The Data saved. message appears. The
phone book entry is now saved as an
address book entry.
The d symbol is replaced by the ¥ symbol.
Telephone
Rthe
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
You can import contacts (vCards) from the
memory card and from a USB device into the
address book, or receive vCards via Bluetooth®.
i Up to 2,500 entries can be imported into
the address book. A message notifies you
when the maximum number is reached.
You then have to delete existing entries in
order to import new entries (Y page 156).
Depending on the source of the contact data,
different requirements apply:
Source
RBluetooth®
must be activated in COMAND
and on the Bluetooth® device; see the operating instructions for the device.
Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to send
vCards via Bluetooth® (see the operating
instructions for the device).
Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must
be switched on.
Importing from the memory card or USB
device
Entries imported from the memory card or
from a USB device have the ¯ symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. COMAND Online
allows you to select the relevant folders
directly.
RvCards must have the ".vcf" file extension.
i One vcf file may contain several vCards.
COMAND Online supports vCards in versions 2.1 and 3.0.
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Select Import contacts and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Select From the memory card or From
USB device in the menu by turning cVd
Conditions
Memory card The SD memory card is
inserted (Y page 217). It
contains importable contact details.
USB device
Requirements for receiving vCards via
Bluetooth®
You can receive vCards from devices (e.g.
from a PC) that support the sending of vCards
via Bluetooth®.
It is not necessary to authorise the device in
COMAND to do so.
Please bear the following in mind:
The USB device is inserted
into the USB port
(Y page 218). It contains
importable contact details.
Using the address book
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Add or Overwrite and press W to
confirm.
Add imports the entries from the memory
card or USB device into the address book.
Overwrite imports the entries from the
memory card or USB device and overwrites
all entries in the address book with the
¯ symbol. The previous entries are then
no longer available.
After the contact data has been imported
successfully, you will see a message to this
effect. The address book or the respective
telephone basic menu is displayed.
i You can select Overwrite if the address
book already contains corresponding
entries. A message notifies you if the
address book is full.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth®
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Import contacts and press W to
confirm.
X Select Receive business cards in the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection
between COMAND Online and your active
mobile phone. COMAND Online is, however, ready to receive vCards from another
Bluetooth® device (PC, mobile phone).
Start the data transfer on the external Bluetooth® device (see the operating instructions for the device).
The number of vCards received is displayed.
X To end reception: press W or the %
back button.
COMAND Online then reconnects to the
mobile phone.
Received vCards are identified by the ®
symbol in the address book.
i If you switch to another main function,
e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the
reception of vCards will be terminated.
Deleting contacts
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Delete contacts and press W to
confirm.
X Select one of the following options:
RInternal contacts
RContacts from storage device
RReceived business cards
RDelete all
A prompt corresponding to your selection
appears.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the contacts are deleted
according to your selection.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Telephone
161
Using the address book
162
Switching import of contacts on/off
to be visible on the screen. You can therefore,
for example, prevent a passenger from seeing
the name of a caller.
Activating the function has the following
effects:
Telephone
RPhone
You can choose to have contacts downloaded
automatically when a mobile phone is connected with COMAND Online or to have this
function suppressed.
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)
X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Import contacts from  and press W to confirm.
You can allow O or suppress ª the automatic download.
Proceed as follows if you do not want to have
sensitive contacts saved in the address book:
Connect the mobile phone with COMAND
Online.
The contacts are automatically downloaded to the address book.
X Delete the sensitive contacts in the
address book.
X Switch off the Import contacts from
 function ª.
Then no contacts will be downloaded and
therefore no new ones will be added when
your mobile phone is reconnected with
COMAND Online.
Switching the display of contact details
on/off (privacy)
Using the Hide data setting, you can decide
whether the phone and address book data are
book and address book data from
the mobile phone are hidden. Therefore,
you cannot use the data to make a call,
send text messages or navigate.
You still have access to the phone and
address book data saved in COMAND
Online.
RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name is
not displayed even if there is an address
book entry for the number that is calling.
RDuring outgoing calls where the number is
entered manually, the recipient's name is
not displayed, even if there is an address
book entry for the entered number.
RThe call list is hidden.
RRedialling is not possible.
RThe received text messages list is hidden.
There is still a notification for incoming text
messages. For this to be the case, the connected mobile phone must support the
MAP profile. However, it is not possible for
the passenger, for example, to view the
phone number or quickly access the data.
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)
X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Mercedes-Benz Contact
To hide details: select Hide data and
press W to confirm.
You can allow ª or prevent O access to
address data.
163
RLuxembourg
RNetherlands
RAustria
RPoland
RSwitzerland
RSlovakia
Mercedes-Benz Contact
RSpain
Introduction
Rthe
vehicle identification number
total distance recorder reading
Rthe vehicle position
Rthe telephone number
Rthe service code (only when required for
maintenance)
Rthe
i Please note that Mercedes-Benz Contact
is a Mercedes-Benz customer service. In
emergencies, always call the national
emergency services first, using the standard national emergency service telephone
numbers.
i Currently, this service is available for vehicles from the following European countries:
RBelgium
RGermany
RFrance
RUnited
RIreland
RItaly
Kingdom
RCzech
Republic
RHungary
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre
G WARNING
Pay attention to the traffic conditions. You
may otherwise be distracted from the traffic
conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.
Call up the COMAND phone book
(Y page 144).
The MB Contact entry is the first entry in
the COMAND phone book. The entry is
highlighted.
There are two ways to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Centre:
X Press W the COMAND controller.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online.
This initiates a call. When the call is connected, a voice message prompts you to
confirm the data transmission by pressing
the stated number on the COMAND Online
keypad. After confirmation, COMAND
Online sends the required vehicle data.
i Alternatively, you can initiate a call using
the multifunction steering wheel (see the
vehicle Owner's Manual).
During data transmission, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display. This may
take a moment. Then, you can select the
desired service and be connected to a specialist from the Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Telephone
Mercedes-Benz Contact offers fast assistance at the touch of a button – around the
clock. For any queries about the vehicle,
Mercedes-Benz Contact offers a fast and easy
connecting call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You can request an appointment, or call for help in the event of a breakdown.
All important vehicle data is sent via mobile
phone to ensure that you receive optimum
support. The mobile phone must be connected to COMAND Online via the Bluetooth®
interface.
The following data is transmitted:
164
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
i Contact your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for further information on
Mercedes-Benz Contact, the range of services offered and on using the function.
Telephone
Demand-actuated service message
To attain the optimal level of support in maintaining your vehicle, you can arrange a service
appointment directly with the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. As well as a warning in the
instrument cluster, a window appears in the
COMAND display. Here, a message actively
indicates that a service is required and this
message enables you to contact the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre directly.
You will see the message: 
is due soon. Would you like to make
a workshop appointment?
X To arrange a service appointment:
select Call now by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
After your confirmation, the vehicle data is
sent via Mercedes-Benz Contact, and a
Customer Centre employee personally
deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service
outlet.
They will then contact with you within 24
hours to confirm the following details:
Rscope
of service
Rlength of stay
Rprice
X To arrange a service appointment
later: select Call later and confirm with
W.
The window is hidden, then reappears after
a certain amount of time.
X To not arrange a service appointment:
select No and confirm with W.
The window is hidden and does not show
this maintenance requirement again.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Overview
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
can help to decisively reduce the time
between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It
can also help locate an accident site in places
that are difficult to see.
The emergency call can be made automatically or manually and is transmitted to the
Europe-wide private Mercedes-Benz emergency call number. The vehicle position data
is simultaneously transmitted by text message and DTMF to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre transmits the vehicle position data to one of the Europe-wide public
emergency call centres. In almost all countries, the voice connection can be made in the
respective country's language. This allows
measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated
quickly.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
function is operational, you see the SOS
READY display message in the basic telephone menu (Y page 167).
Information on service availability in Europe
(Y page 164).
i Note that manual emergency calls should
only be used if you or others are in need of
rescue, not e.g. in the event of a breakdown.
Service availability in Europe
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
available for your vehicle for 15 years after
the initial date of production, if:
Rit
is equipped with COMAND Online
Rit was originally produced for the European
market
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
You can find more information on the regional
availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect_ecall.
165
ted and the mobile phone should be placed
in the bracket.
This provides you with the following advantages:
Conditions
Equipment requirements
You need:
Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone which,
if possible, supports the MAP profile (Message Access Profile) for sending text messages, or
Rif the vehicle is equipped with permanently
installed/SAP telephony, a SIM card or a
suitable mobile phone
Functional requirements
The vehicle has GPS reception.
Check the following:
Ra
RCOMAND
Online is switched on
using the Bluetooth® interface, the
mobile phone must be authorised for and
connected with COMAND Online, and logged into a mobile phone network
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)
Reconnecting the mobile phone automatically (Y page 136)
If your vehicle is equipped with permanently
installed/SAP telephony, one of the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
Rwhen
Rin "telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
profile)", a SIM card has been entered and
is logged into the mobile phone network.
SAP (SIM Access Profile)
Ra suitable SAP-capable mobile phone is
connected to "telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)" via the SAP profile and
is logged into the mobile phone network.
i SAP telephony is described in the separate operating instructions.
i If your vehicle is equipped with a mobile
phone bracket, the bracket should be inser-
mobile phone is protected from any
mechanical damage in the event of an
accident.
Rthe mobile phone remains charged.
Rin most cases, the transmitting and
receiving power of a mobile phone is better if the mobile phone is placed in its
bracket.
If the mobile phone is connected, you see the
SOS READY display message in the basic telephone menu in front of the name of the mobile
phone (Y page 167).
i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre or at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
i Before using this function, make sure that
your mobile phone contract:
Rpermits
calls, text messages and roaming from both your country of residence
and from abroad, and
Rthat these functions have been activated
Automatic emergency call
! If an emergency call has been made: provided the road and traffic conditions at the
accident site allow it, remain in the vehicle
until the voice connection with the operator
at the emergency call centre has been
established.
On the basis of the call, the operator can
decide whether it is necessary to deploy
rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
i Depending on the severity of the accident, it can take between one and three
minutes until the operator can speak with
you.
Telephone
Rthe
Telephone
166
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
REQUIREMENT: the ignition is switched on.
If restraint systems have been triggered during an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can automatically dial the
Europe-wide private Mercedes-Benz emergency call number. Restraint systems
include, for example, airbags or belt tensioners. The emergency call system can establish
a voice connection between the vehicle occupants and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
centre.
The accident data is sent to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre by SMS and
DTMF while the voice connection is operating. The accident data contains metre-precise
GPS positioning data for the moment it is
sent, as well as the type of vehicle involved in
the accident.
rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
Vehicles equipped with an SOS button
If your vehicle is equipped with the SOS button in the overhead control unit:
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least
one second.
The manual emergency call is triggered.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
i In the following cases, you see a corresponding message on the COMAND display:
Ra
connection to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre could not be made
Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre
In such circumstances, dial the emergency
number 112 on your mobile phone.
i If your vehicle is equipped with an SOS
button in the overhead control unit, it
flashes until the emergency call has been
completed.
i It is not possible to end an automatic
emergency call.
i In the following cases, you see a corresponding message on the COMAND display:
Ra
connection to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre could not be made
Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre
In such circumstances, dial the emergency
number 112 on your mobile phone.
Manual emergency call
In the address book
Call up the address book (Y page 155).
The 1st entry, Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call, is highlighted.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre is triggered.
i If you have accidentally made a manual
emergency call, you can end it in the following ways:
Rby
pressing the ~ button on
COMAND Online
Rby pressing the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel
! If an emergency call has been made: pro-
i In the following cases, you see a corre-
vided the road and traffic conditions at the
accident site allow it, remain in the vehicle
until the voice connection with the operator
at the emergency call centre has been
established.
On the basis of the call, the operator can
decide whether it is necessary to deploy
sponding message on the COMAND display:
Ra
connection to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre could not be made
Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
In such circumstances, dial the emergency
number 112 on your mobile phone.
Transmitted data
Depending on how the data is transmitted
(text message or DTMF), different data is
transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
Text messages transmit the following:
167
If position and vehicle data are sent to the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, you
see the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
Sending data display message.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call connects with the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call centre, you see the Mercedes-Benz
Emergency Call Connected display message.
Rthe
vehicle's GPS position data
direction of travel
Rthe vehicle identification number
Ra Mercedes-Benz Contact coding
Ran indication of whether the call was triggered automatically or manually
Ra time stamp
Rthe language settings on COMAND Online
DTMF sends a reduced data package that
does not contain the vehicle identification
number and time stamp.
Telephone
Rthe
Displays in the COMAND display
: Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
operational
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call is available, you see the SOS READY display message
in the basic telephone menu.
If a Mercedes-Benz emergency call is triggered either automatically or manually, you
also see the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call active display message.
168
169
170
170
171
178
179
182
186
191
195
196
197
Online and Internet functions
Features of your COMAND Online ...
General notes ....................................
Setting access data ..........................
Establishing/ending the connection
Google™ Local Search ......................
Destination/route download ...........
Weather .............................................
Options ..............................................
Additional services ...........................
Internet radio ....................................
Internet ..............................................
170
General notes
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
phone to establish a dial-up connection to
the Internet.
RYou need a valid mobile service contract
with a data option, which is used to calculate the associated connection costs.
RThe access data of the mobile phone network provider must be set on COMAND
Online for the connected mobile phone
(Y page 171).
i If the connected mobile phone supports
General notes
Online and Internet functions
Conditions for access
G WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communications equipment in the vehicle
while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND Online.
The COMAND Online Mercedes-Benz Apps
and Internet access are available via the Bluetooth® interface or via the data-enabled MB
SAP module.
In order to use the functions, the following
conditions are necessary:
mobile phone supports the DUN Bluetooth® profile (Dial-Up Networking) and is
connected to COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface (Y page 132). The DUN
Bluetooth® profile enables the mobile
the PAN Bluetooth profile (Personal Area
Network), you can use the automatic configuration function (Y page 172).
i You can obtain more detailed information
about suitable mobile phones on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect or from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i If you use incorrect access data, additional costs may be incurred. This can happen when you use details that are different
from the contract or details from another
contract/data package.
i The availability of individual MercedesBenz Apps may vary depending on the
country.
i The terms of use are shown when
COMAND Online is used for the first time
and then once a year thereafter. Only read
and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary.
i Internet pages cannot be shown on the
driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.
RThe
Connection difficulties while the vehicle is in motion
The following could be the cause of call disconnection:
Rinsufficient
GSM/UMTS network coverage
Rthe vehicle has moved into a GSM cell with
no free channels
Setting access data
SIM card used is not compatible with
the network available
Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is logged into the network at
the same time.
Function restrictions
You will not be able to use the mobile phone,
will no longer be able to use the mobile phone,
or you may have to wait before using it, in the
following situations:
the mobile phone is switched off
Rif the "Bluetooth®" function is switched off
in COMAND Online
Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on
the mobile phone while you are using Bluetooth® interface telephony
Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a
mobile phone network
Rif neither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
phone and an Internet connection
Setting access data
Introduction
To use online and Internet functions, you
need Internet access data for the connected
mobile phone. You can obtain this from your
mobile phone network provider.
A selected/manually set mobile phone network provider is only valid for the mobile
phone connected when the selection/setting
is made. The mobile phone network provider
is set automatically upon reconnection.
i When you are driving your vehicle in a different country and using the online and
Internet functions on COMAND Online, you
may incur additional costs (roaming fees).
Rif
i While initialising the mobile phone for the
Internet connection, access data which is
already on the mobile phone may be overwritten. You should therefore check the
settings on the mobile phone (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
i Adjust the access data settings when the
vehicle is stationary. You may otherwise be
distracted from the traffic conditions,
cause an accident and injure yourself and
others.
i It is possible that you may not be able to
receive calls when an Internet connection
is active. This depends on the mobile phone
and the mobile phone network used.
Roaming
When you are driving your vehicle in a different country and using the COMAND Online
Internet and online functions, you may incur
additional costs (roaming fees). When you are
in a different country, your SIM card must be
enabled for data roaming. If your mobile
phone network provider does not have a data
roaming agreement with the roaming partner,
it may not be possible to establish an Internet
connection. Deactivate this function on your
mobile phone if you want to avoid data roaming when you are in a different country.
Selecting/setting Internet access
data
Calling up the list of mobile phone network providers
Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
Online and Internet functions
Rthe
171
Setting access data
172
List of mobile phone network providers (empty)
In order to set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider you can:
Online and Internet functions
Rselect
Select Settings by sliding ÆV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
When you connect the mobile phone to
COMAND Online for the first time, there is
no mobile phone network provider preset
(Y page 132). Provider: is followed by the
words not selected.
If a mobile phone is connected and a mobile
phone network provider has been selected,
the name of the mobile phone network is
shown after Provider.
the predefined access data of the
mobile phone network provider
(Y page 173)
Rfor automatic configuration – this option
only appears in the list of providers if the
connected mobile phone supports the
Bluetooth® PAN (Personal Area Network)
profile (Y page 172).
Rmanually set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider (Y page 175)
Configuring access data automatically
Press W the COMAND controller.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears.
Requirement: your telephone must be connected to COMAND Online via Bluetooth®
and must support the Bluetooth® PAN profile.
Option 1 if your telephone is not yet configured for Internet access:
Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
Setting access data
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see a message informing you that
automatic configuration is possible.
173
again each time the mobile phone is connected (Y page 171).
Select Yes and press W to confirm.
Option 2:
In the list of mobile phone network providers, select Autom. configuration
 by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 171).
The configuration data is transferred from
the mobile phone. If the configuration is
successful, a # dot appears in front of
Autom. configuration
.
i You must set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card and the associated data
package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains
the same if you are in a different country
(roaming). The access data of another network is not selected.
There are mobile phone network providers
who offer multiple access data. This
depends on the data package used, for
example.
Selecting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Searching for providers
Select Search for providers in the
mobile phone network providers list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm (Y page 171).
A list of countries appears.
Select the country of your mobile phone
network provider, e.g. Germany, and press
W to confirm.
The list of available mobile phone network
providers appears.
i The access data for the mobile phone network provider is selected once for the
mobile phone connected and is loaded
The mobile phone network provider only
has one access setting
Select the mobile phone network provider
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Online and Internet functions
Setting access data
174
To check preset access data: select
Edit and confirm with W.
The list of access data appears
(Y page 175).
X Check the access data.
Online and Internet functions
If the access data is correct: press the
% reset button or the & symbol and
press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the
mobile phone network provider.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears; the access data of the provider
has been accepted.
To edit the access data: proceed as
described for manually entering the access
data (Y page 175).
When you confirm the edited access data,
the list of mobile phone network providers
appears and displays the selected provider.
If the access data is correct: press the
% reset button or the & symbol and
press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the
mobile phone network provider.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears; the access data of the provider
has been accepted.
To edit the access data: proceed as
described in "Manually setting the access
data of the mobile phone network provider"
(Y page 175).
When you confirm the edited access data,
the list of mobile phone network providers
appears and displays the selected provider.
If, after selecting a mobile phone network
provider, several access settings are displayed:
Select the appropriate access setting by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
List of mobile phone network providers with the
selected provider
The currently selected access settings (# dot
in front of the entry) are used for the connected mobile phone.
X To return to the carousel view: press the
% back button twice.
or
X Press W the COMAND controller and then
the % back button.
To check access settings: select Edit
and press W to confirm.
The list of access data appears
(Y page 175).
X Check the access data.
Setting access data
Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider
175
Explanation of the access data
Input field
Meaning
Provider:
Name of the provider to
be displayed in the list of
mobile phone network
providers. The name can
be freely selected.
The standard entry is
Provider .
Ph. number:
Access number for establishing the connection
depends on the mobile
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones,
*99***1# is used as a
standard.
Access
point:
List of access data (new provider)
Calling up the list of access data
Confirm Create new provider in the list
of mobile phone network providers by
pressing W the COMAND controller.
The list of access data appears. The standard name Provider  is automatically
entered into the Provider field. You can
now make the entries.
APN network access point
(Access Point Name)
You can obtain this information from your mobile
phone network provider.
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone
network providers and
mobile phones.
User ID:
i The access data of the mobile phone net-
The user identification
can be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
i Entry is not necessary
work provider is set once for the connected
mobile phone.
for all mobile phone
network providers.
Password:
The password can be
obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone
network providers.
Online and Internet functions
i The access number
Setting access data
176
Input field
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The input menu for the phone number
appears.
Meaning
DNS address: The DNS addresses
(Domain Name Service)
can be negotiated automatically or entered manually. The required information can be obtained
from your mobile phone
network provider.
Online and Internet functions
i Most mobile phone
network providers support the Automatic
function. If you selected
the Manual option, you
are usually required to
enter a DNS address.
DNS 1:
DNS 2:
Fields for entering the
DNS server addresses
manually. The address
can be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
Enter the telephone number.
To enter the access data: in the list of
access data, select the Access point:
input field and confirm by pressing W .
X Enter the access data.
Entering access data
To enter the user ID: in the list of access
data, select the User ID: input field and
confirm by pressing W .
X Enter the user ID.
In the list of access data, confirm the Pro‐
vider input field by pressing
W(Y page 175).
An input menu appears.
Enter the provider (Y page 34).
To enter the phone number: in the list of
access data, select the Ph. number: input
field by sliding ÆV or turning cVd the
To enter the password: in the list of
access data, select the Password: input
field and confirm by pressing W .
X Enter the password.
To set the DNS address: select Auto‐
matic or Manual with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Automatic: the DNS address is set automatically.
Setting access data
Manual: uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS
2.
177
Managing access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Overview
The access data of the mobile phone network
provider can be:
Redited
Rcopied, then edited and accepted for a new
provider name
Rdeleted
data of a mobile phone network provider
apply to all mobile phones that use this
access data.
Entering the DNS1
Entering the example DNS
After selecting Manual, select the DNS1
input field with the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Enter 172.28.4.81, for example.
i When the Internet connection is active,
you cannot edit or delete the access data
of the currently set mobile phone network
provider.
Editing the access data
Internet access data for other mobile
phones
If the access data is already available in the
list of mobile phone network providers, you
can use it for additional mobile phones.
The following prerequisites are required for
this:
additional mobile phone must be connected.
Rthe access data must apply to the mobile
phone contract of the currently connected
mobile phone.
X Select a provider from the list of mobile
phone network providers by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm (Y page 173).
After you select the provider, the list of
mobile phone network providers is closed.
The selected provider is entered.
Select a provider from the list of mobile
phone network providers by turning cVd
the COMAND controller (Y page 173).
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Rthe
Confirm Edit by pressing W.
The access data is displayed.
X Edit the access data. A description of the
entry can be found under "Manually setting
the access data of the mobile phone network provider" (Y page 175).
Online and Internet functions
i Changes that you make to the access
Establishing/ending the connection
178
Saving access data under a new provider name
Select a provider from the list of mobile
phone network providers by turning cVd
the COMAND controller (Y page 173).
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Online and Internet functions
Confirm Copy provider entry by pressing W.
The access data is displayed.
X Edit the access data. A description of the
entry can be found under "Making entries"
in the "Manually setting the access data of
the mobile phone network provider" section (Y page 175).
If a preset time has elapsed during which neither the online functions nor the Internet have
been used, COMAND Online automatically
disconnects from the Internet.
X Select Settings in the carousel view by
sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Disconnect automatically
after: and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select 5 min, 15 min or Off and press
W to confirm.
Off switches the function off.
An active Internet connection is identified by
the double arrows on the top right of the display.
Deleting the access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Establishing/ending the connection
Establishing the connection
Select a provider from the list of mobile
phone network providers by turning cVd
the COMAND controller (Y page 173).
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Confirm Delete by pressing W.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the access data.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
Selecting the length of time for automatic disconnection from the Internet
The conditions for establishing a connection
are described in "General notes"
(Y page 170).
X Option 1: select the ® icon in the main
function bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller until the Mercedes-Benz Apps
panel or a favourite is brought to the front,
if these have been previously created
(Y page 202).
Google™ Local Search
Option 2: enter a web address
(Y page 197).
179
Ending the connection
Press the ~ button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
Select the scissors symbol on the bottom
right of the carousel view and press W to
confirm.
i If the mobile phone Internet connection is
Google™ Local Search
Calling up the local search menu
For both options, press W the COMAND
controller.
The Internet connection is established. An
active Internet connection is identified with
symbol :. The example shows the menu
in the
Google™ Local Search(Y page 180) function.
To cancel the connection: while the connection is being established, confirm Can‐
cel by pressing W.
or
Press the ~ button on COMAND Online
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
i If a phone call is made at the same time
as the active Internet connection, the ¡
symbol is displayed in :. The Internet connection remains active depending on the
mobile phone and mobile phone network
used.
Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.
X Bring the Google Local Search panel to
the front and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: select Back by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Online and Internet functions
cancelled, COMAND Online tries to reconnect. You should therefore always close the
connection on COMAND Online or via the
multifunction steering wheel.
Google™ Local Search
180
Search
Entry restriction
Online and Internet functions
It is only possible to enter a search term in
the input menu when the vehicle is stationary.
After entering the search term, select
¬ by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. Here, you can select
where the destination search should begin.
Entering a search term
Selecting a search position
Input menu
Confirm Search in the Local search menu
by pressing W.
The input menu appears.
To enter using the character bar: enter
the search term.
X To enter characters using the number
pad: press the number keys in rapid succession.
The character appears when the key is
pressed. The first available character is
highlighted.
After a search term has been entered and
confirmed, a menu appears.
COMAND Online searches for available
POIs for the search term entered:
Rnear the current vehicle position
Ralong the calculated route
If a destination has previously been
entered, the function is available.
Rnear the destination
If a destination has previously been
entered, the function is available.
Rnear an address
X After selecting Near destination, enter
an address and confirm.
The search results are displayed.
Example: Google™ search results
Using search results
Select an entry in the list of search results
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To show the detailed view: confirm
Details by pressing W the COMAND controller.
The address of the selected entry is displayed.
To use a search result as the destination: select Navigate to by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation (Y page 68).
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation.
i The search result is stored in the
"Last destinations" memory at the same
time (Y page 110). You can take the destination from this memory and save it per-
manently in the destination memory
(Y page 108).
X To call up a destination: select Call with
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 140).
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call.
i If there is no phone number available, the
menu item cannot be selected.
X To import a destination: select Import
with the COMAND controller and press W
to confirm.
You can choose whether you want to save
the POI as a personal POI on the SD memory card or in the address book.
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
the As personal POI menu item cannot
be selected.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
To save as a personal POI: confirm Save
as personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation (Y page 86).
If the personal POI is saved on the SD memory, you can also use it for route calculation
in another vehicle.
X To save to the address book: select To
address book by turning cVd the
181
Online and Internet functions
Google™ Local Search
Destination/route download
182
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Search history
Online and Internet functions
Popular searches
This function allows you to search using predefined search criteria.
X Bring Popular searches in the local
search menu to the front by turning cVd
(the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
A menu displays the available search criteria.
This function offers you the previous search
queries.
X Bring Search history in the local search
menu to the front by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The previous search queries are shown
with the most recent at the top.
Example: popular Google™ searches
Select the search criteria and press W to
confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
search position" section (Y page 180). If
the vehicle is stationary, the search results
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
Adler".
Select the search criteria and press W to
confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
search position" section (Y page 180). If
the vehicle is stationary, the search results
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
Adler".
Destination/route download
Introduction
You can send destinations and routes from
Google™ maps to the server and download
these via this function. You can use the des-
Destination/route download
183
tinations and routes for route guidance and
save them for further use.
Step 1: sending destinations/routes
to the server
Bring the Destination/route download
panel to the front and press W to confirm.
i With Exit, you quit the destination/route
download.
With Options, you set the options for the
destination/route download
(Y page 194).
X Confirm the Destination/route down‐
load panel by pressing W.
Available routes and destinations are
shown in the list.
Step 2: downloading destinations/
routes from the server
Proceed as follows to use destinations/
routes that have been sent to the server:
Select the ® symbol in the main function
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.
You can save up to 20 routes and 50 destinations for your vehicle on the server and display these in the list. If you send further routes
or destinations to the server, the existing
entries are deleted from the list.
i The routes/destinations sent from Google™ maps to the server are automatically
deleted from there after seven days.
Online and Internet functions
Call up the website for Google™ Maps on
the Internet.
X Select the destination.
X Select "Mercedes-Benz" as the company
entry.
X Select identification for the download (vehicle identification number or e-mail
address).
X Confirm "Send" on the Google™ Maps website.
The destinations/routes are sent to the
server.
i The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
preset at the factory as identification for
download. Instead of the vehicle ID, you
can also enter your e-mail address here
(Y page 194).
The availability of the Google™ Maps function is country-dependant.
Destination/route download
184
Step 3: using destinations/routes
Displaying details
Calling up a menu
Online and Internet functions
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Example for start and destination
Example of a destination address
Confirm Details in the menu by pressing
W the COMAND controller.
The route or destination is displayed.
To call up a POI: confirm the entry by
pressing W.
i You can use the function if:
Ra
mobile phone is connected
(Y page 132)
Rthe destination address contains a telephone number
Using as a destination
Importing a destination/route
When importing, you can choose whether you
want to save the destination as a personal POI
on an SD memory card or in the address book.
You can only save routes as personal POIs to
an SD memory card, but not in the address
book.
X Select Import in the menu with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
the As personal POI menu item is greyed
out.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 217).
Select Navigate to in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation (Y page 68).
i A route can only be stored as a personal
POI on an SD memory card or taken directly
for route calculation (Y page 185).
Placing a call at the destination
Select Call in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 140).
To save as a personal POI: confirm As
personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation (Y page 86).
You can also use a personal POI in another
vehicle for route calculation.
X To save to the address book: select To
address book by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
185
Online and Internet functions
Destination/route download
Weather
186
Deleting a destination/route from the
server
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until
Mercedes-Benz Apps is brought to the
front and press W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps carousel view
appears.
Online and Internet functions
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A query appears asking whether the destination or the route should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
Weather
Introduction
COMAND can receive weather forecasts anywhere in the world via online connection and
display them in an information chart (current
day, 5-day forecast) or in the weather map.
The weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
icons (e.g. storms, slippery conditions)
Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)
Ratmospheric pressure conditions
Rtemperatures
Rcloud cover
Rwind direction and speeds
Turn cVd the COMAND controller until
Weather is brought to the front and press
W to confirm.
The information chart shows the current
weather at the current vehicle position (factory setting). You can change the default
view and the default location in the Options
menu (Y page 192).
Rhazard
You see the following information:
Rthe
Switching the weather display on/off
To switch on: select the ® icon in the
main function bar by turning cVd the
time of the current weather report
current temperature
Rinformation on the weather (e.g. cloudy,
rain)
Rthe maximum daytime temperature
Rthe minimum daytime temperature
Rthe
Weather
Rthe
probability of rain
Rthe forecast for the current day (three time
intervals)
187
Select Info in the information chart by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The information chart displays information
for the selected location.
Selecting the location
Introduction
You can select the following options for the
weather forecast:
Rthe
To switch to a five-day forecast: confirm
5-day by pressing W.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selected location.
X To return to the current weather information: confirm Current by pressing W.
To deactivate: press the % back button.
or
Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, the carousel view will appear.
Option 1: selecting the location in the
information chart
Select Position in the information chart
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To select the current vehicle position:
confirm Current position by pressing
W.
To select the destination: select Near
destination by turning cVd the
Displaying additional information
In addition to the current temperatures, you
can also display information such as humidity
and air quality (if the information is available).
Online and Internet functions
current vehicle position
destination
Ra winter sports area
Ra location anywhere in the world
You can select the location in the information
chart (option 1 (Y page 187)) or in the map
(option 2) (Y page 189). Weather information
is supplied by the nearest weather station.
Rthe
Weather
188
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If a route has been calculated, you can
select Near destination(Y page 68). The
menu item is otherwise greyed out.
Online and Internet functions
To select a winter sports area: select In
winter sports areas in the menu and
press W to confirm.
A list of countries appears.
To select the location: select Other
location in the menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Enter the search area. Character entry
(Y page 36).
The information chart with the weather
forecast appears when the search area has
been entered.
Select a country, e.g. ANDORRA, and press
W to confirm.
The available winter sports areas are displayed.
Select a winter sports area from the menu
and press W to confirm.
The information chart shows information
on:
Rtype of skiing
Rsnow conditions
Rtemperatures
Entry
Example
Postcode
10117
City
Berlin
Address
Unter den Linden
Airport code
TXL (Tegel Airport)
Weather
Option 2: selecting the location in the
weather map
189
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
Call up the weather map and move to the
desired location (Y page 189).
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X Press W the COMAND controller again and
confirm Display weather.
The information chart displays the current
weather for the selected location.
Calling up the weather map
Select Map in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The map appears in a scale of 20 km.
To display the crosshair: slide ZV the
COMAND controller.
X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY,
ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
The weather map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.
To change the map scale: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, the
scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
i The data is downloaded again from the
To show: press W the COMAND controller
in the weather map.
X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND controller.
Switching to the weather information
display in the map
Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 189).
X Select View by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Weather characteristic
Display in the map
Hazard icons
Shows warnings
Weather
radar
Displays the rain radar as
a coloured area on the
map
server for these functions. This can delay
the display of the weather map.
Online and Internet functions
Weather map
Weather
Online and Internet functions
190
Weather characteristic
Display in the map
Atmospheric
pressure
Displays air pressure
with isobars and as a coloured area on the map
Temperatures
Displays the temperatures
Cloud cover
Displays the cloud cover
Winds
Displays wind direction
with an arrow and wind
speed with colouring
Legend for warnings
i The hazard icon display is preset in the
factory. This presetting can be changed in
the Options menu (Y page 192).
Select a weather characteristic by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates which weather characteristic is currently displayed on the map.
You can select one weather characteristic
at a time.
Legend
Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 189).
X Select View by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Legend and press W to confirm.
The legend is displayed in accordance with
the currently selected weather characteristic.
Legend for precipitation radar
To switch back to the information
chart: display the menu on the weather
map. (Y page 189)
X Select Display weather and press W to
confirm.
Memory functions
Storing a location in the memory
You can save locations that are called up frequently in ten preset positions (0, 1 – 9).
X Select the location (Y page 187).
Press and hold a number key.
When the location is saved, the number of
the selected preset comes before the name
of the place in the caption.
Selecting a location from the memory
Quick select: when the weather display
(COMAND Online) is switched on and an
Options
From the weather memory: select Posi‐
tion in the information chart by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Presets and press W to confirm.
X Select a preset position that has an entry
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The information chart appears and displays
the weather information.
Select the ® symbol in the main function
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Selecting options for the local search
Setting the search radius
Online and Internet functions
entry is available, press a number key, e.g.
l.
The information chart appears and displays
the weather information.
Options
Introduction
You can select options for the following
Mercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND Online:
search (Y page 191)
page 192)
RDestination/route download
(Y page 194)
You can reset the selected options to the
default settings (Y page 195).
RLocal
RWeather (Y
Calling up the Options menu
Options menu
191
Select Local Search in the Options menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings.
Confirm the entry after Search radius:
by pressing W.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
search radius.
Options
192
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Deleting/saving search queries
Select the Delete all searches entry by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A prompt appears, asking whether you
really wish to delete the search queries.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
Selecting a service provider
Selecting options for the weather display
Online and Internet functions
Setting the default view
You can specify which view is called up after
activating the weather display (Y page 186).
You can make the following settings:
Rcurrent
weather
forecast
Rinfo view
Rlast view
Rfive-day
Select Local Search in the Options menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings.
Select the entry after Service pro‐
vider: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
service provider.
i If the entry is greyed out, you cannot
select the service provider.
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The selected service provider is accepted.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Select Weather in the options menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm (Y page 191).
The menu shows the current settings.
Confirm the entry after Default view: by
pressing W.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
default view.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected view is accepted.
Options
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Setting the default location
You can make the following settings:
Rcurrent
Rcurrent
position
destination
Rpresets
Select Weather in the options menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm (Y page 191).
The menu shows the current settings.
Select the entry after Default loca‐
tion: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
default location.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected location is accepted.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Selecting weather data for the map
view
The weather map can display the following
weather data:
Rhazard
icons (e.g. storms, slippery conditions)
Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)
Ratmospheric pressure conditions
Rtemperatures
Rcloud cover
Rwind direction and speeds
You can select one feature each for the map
view.
The availability of weather information is
country-dependent.
Select Weather in the options menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm (Y page 191).
The menu shows the current settings.
Select the entry after Default map
view: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
feature.
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The selected feature is accepted.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Online and Internet functions
193
Options
194
Setting options for destination/route
download
Specifying the ID for the download
within 48 hours. Otherwise, your previous
ID will continue to be used.
X To complete the settings, check your mailbox and follow the link in the e-mail.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Online and Internet functions
Setting the type of import
You can replace the vehicle identification
number (ID) with your e-mail address. The
vehicle identification number is usually
entered.
X Select Destination/route download in
the Options menu by sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 191).
The menu shows the current settings.
Confirm the entry next to ID: by pressing
W.
An input menu appears.
Enter an e-mail address. Enter the characters (Y page 34).
X After entry, select ¬ and press W to
confirm.
The e-mail address is entered in the menu.
An e-mail will be sent to your e-mail address
shortly afterwards. You must confirm it
You can choose between manual and automatic importing.
X Select the entry after Import: by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select Manual or Automatic and press
W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Deleting/keeping POIs after they have
been imported to the server
Select the entry after Import & delete:
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the
server.
Additional services
No does not delete the POIs on the server.
Additional services
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
195
i Routes and destinations are automatically deleted on the server after seven
days.
The reset function resets all Mercedes-Benz
Apps settings to the factory settings. After
resetting, Google™ can only send routes and
destinations to the vehicle identification number (ID) once you have activated your e-mail
address again (Y page 194).
X Select the ® symbol in the main function
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to reset.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the settings are reset.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
The COMAND Online functions contain the
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a predefined favourite.
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐
site panel to the front by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz home page appears.
i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz
Mobile Website panel.
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps
You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz
Apps, such as Facebook, or Google™ services, such as Street View or Panoramio, here.
Online and Internet functions
Resetting adjustments
Internet radio
196
The following examples show how to call up
a Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook,
and generally how to call up Google™ services.
To call up Facebook:
The data transfer rate of a station is displayed
while receiving data.
Calling up the Internet radio
Online and Internet functions
Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.
X Select Facebook by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The Facebook homepage appears.
X To call up Google™ services: this is done
through Google™ Local Search
(Y page 182).
i Facebook is a social networking website.
This App allows you to log in from your
vehicle and use Facebook's many functions.
Google™ Street View allows you to view
streets in 360-degree panoramas.
Google™ Panoramio expands Google Local
Search to include photos at the selected
position.
Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Internet Radio panel to the
front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The Internet radio menu appears.
Searching for stations
Select Search in the Internet radio menu.
A list with search criteria appears.
X Select criterion and press W to confirm.
Internet radio
i For example as a search criterion, you can
General notes
set an Internet radio station that is located
close to your navigation destination.
A good Internet connection is required to
transmit audio data efficiently. To ensure the
best-possible reception, your mobile phone
should be connected to the vehicle's exterior
aerial via the phone bracket (optional).
Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of
data can be transmitted when using the Internet radio. An average 128 kBit per second
data transfer rate can transfer 56 MB of data
in one hour.
Connecting to a station
Search for a station (Y page 196).
Select Internet radio ; (play) in the
menu and press W to confirm.
The call is placed.
If the data stream is interrupted, an automatic
attempt is made to re-establish the connection.
Internet
Manually re-establishing a connection
Option 1: entering the web address
You can enter the web address using either
the character bar or the number keypad
(Y page 36).
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
X Select www by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Select Internet radio ; (play) again in
the menu and press W to confirm.
Ending data transfer:
Select Internet radio É (stop) in the
menu and press W to confirm.
or
Change to another audio source, for example Disc.
197
Internet
Display restriction
Internet pages cannot be shown while the
vehicle is in motion.
Calling up a website
Calling up the carousel view
To enter using the character bar: enter
the web address in the input line. Character
entry (Y page 34).
As soon as the first letter has been entered
in the input line, a list appears below it. The
list shows web addresses that begin with
the letters you have entered and web
addresses that have already been called
up.
The list is empty the first time you call it up.
Select the ® symbol in the main function
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
You can now enter a web address (option 1
(Y page 197)) or select it in the carousel view
(option 2 (Y page 198)).
To select in the carousel view, you must first
create favourites (Y page 202).
Online and Internet functions
If you change to a main function that is not an
audio source, e.g. navigation, the data connection remains on. You can continue listening to the set station.
Internet
198
To enter characters using the number
pad: press the number keys in rapid succession.
The character appears when the key is
pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. Enter the character using the character bar (Y page 37).
Select the web address by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The web address is entered in the input line.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The website is called up. The Establish‐
ing data connection to ... message appears.
Option 2: selecting favourites
Online and Internet functions
You must create at least one favourite in the
carousel view for this function (Y page 202).
After entering the web address, select the
¬ symbol by turning cVd or sliding
XVY the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The website is called up.
To select a web address in the list: slide
ZV the COMAND controller in the input
menu with character bar.
The list is activated.
Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
In the carousel view, bring a favourite to the
front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The website is called up.
Internet
Overview
Step
Activity
Turn cVd the
controller.
Navigates from one
item that can be
selected (e.g. link,
text field or selection list) to the next
and highlights the
respective element
on the website.
Sliding the controller:
Moves the pointer
on the page.
Left or right XVY
X Up or down ZVÆ
X Diagonally aVb
Press W the controller.
Calls up the menu or
opens the selected
item.
Press %.
Calls up the previous page.
Press j.
Closes the Internet
browser. If several
windows are open,
the current window
is closed.
Example: highlighting an item that can
be selected
Turn cVd COMAND Controller.
A button is highlighted in the example.
Example: entering text
Select an input line by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The character bar appears.
Enter the text using the character bar or the
number keypad. Character entry
(Y page 34).
X If the text has been entered, select
the¬symbol by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The text has now been entered.
Online and Internet functions
Navigating the website
199
Internet
200
Menu functions
Calling up a menu
To call up the entire menu: when the
shortcut is displayed, slide VÆ the
COMAND controller downwards.
or
Select a free area on the website by sliding
ZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Opening
Online and Internet functions
To call up the shortcut: highlight the
selectable item on the page by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Opens the website to the selectable item.
X Call up the menu (Y page 200).
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
Entering a URL
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Enter URL by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 197).
Calling up the previous website
Start of menu
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Calling up the next website
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Next by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
View
You can use this function to:
End of menu
Rposition
a selection window on websites
that are larger than the display
Rselect a window that is already open
Internet
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select View by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
201
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
or
Press the z key on the number keypad.
i You cannot use the z key if a phone
Press W the COMAND controller.
The website is displayed.
Exiting the menu
To position the selection window: confirm Full-screen view of current
page by pressing W the COMAND controller.
A selection window appears on the website.
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Internet browser is closed. If other windows are opened in the background,
another prompt appears.
Other menu functions
Opening in a new window
You can open up to five windows simultaneously.
X Call up the menu (Y page 200).
X Select Open in new window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND
controller and position the selection window on the website.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The selected section is enlarged.
To display and select open windows:
select Display open windows by turning
To select a window: select View and press
W to confirm.
X Select the website in the carousel view by
turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Add to favourites
Adds the current website to the favourites.
The website can then be called up using the
Online and Internet functions
call is being made.
Internet
202
carousel view. You can save up to 20 favourites in the carousel view.
X Call up the menu (Y page 200).
X Select Add to favourites by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The following message appears: The page
has been added as a favourite.
Display favourites
Online and Internet functions
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Display favourites by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The favourites are shown in the carousel
view.
Further information on favourites
(Y page 202).
Reloading a website
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Close active window
Settings
The settings are described in a separate section (Y page 205).
Favourites
Introduction
Favourites are frequently visited websites.
You have the following options for creating a
favourite:
the carousel view (Y page 202)
the menu item Add to favour‐
ites(Y page 201)
Before creating a favourite in the carousel
view, you must first close active connections
(Y page 179).
You can select and edit favourites that you
have created.
Rin
Rvia
Creating favourites
Creating favourites in the carousel view
Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
Bring the Create new favourite panel to
the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY
the COMAND controller.
Press W the COMAND controller.
An input menu appears.
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
X Select Close active window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
X Press the j button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
i You cannot use the j button if a
phone call is being made.
Displaying the complete web address of the
selected link
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Link details by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The web address (URL) appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller and close
the display.
Internet
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad. Character entry (Y page 34)
X Select the ¬ symbol and press W to
confirm.
The favourite has been created.
Adding a favourite via the menu
When a website is displayed, call up the
menu.
X Select Add to favourites in the menu
and press W to confirm (Y page 201).
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad (Y page 34).
Editing favourites in the Favourites menu
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
Select Display favourites by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The favourite is displayed.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The Favourites menu appears.
Selecting favourites
Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
Select the favourite in the carousel view by
turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The favourite is opened.
Editing favourites
Editing favourites in the carousel view
Favourites menu
Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
X Select Edit by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
Press the g key on the number keypad.
An input menu appears.
Online and Internet functions
203
Internet
204
Exiting
Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).
Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
Online and Internet functions
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad. Character entry (Y page 34).
Other functions in the Favourites menu
Opening current favourites
Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).
Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
Opens the current favourites in a new window.
Opening in a new window
Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).
X Select Open in new window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Deleting favourites
Deleting favourites in the carousel view
Call up the carousel view (Y page 197).
Select Delete by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A query appears.
X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
The favourite is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Deleting favourites in the Favourites
menu
Calling up details
or
Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).
X Select Details by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the z key on the number keypad.
The detailed display appears.
Press the % back button on the left next
to the COMAND controller.
The Favourites menu closes.
Select Delete by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Press the j button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
The favourite is deleted.
Internet
Settings
Settings menu
205
You can select a different character set
here, e.g. if the characters of a website
appear distorted.
RDeleting private data
Deletes data which has been saved by the
browser during Internet use.
Changing settings
Call up the menu (Y page 200).
X Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You can activate/deactivate the following
settings:
RDownload
images automatically
It may take some time to download the
contents of websites that contain a large
number of images. Therefore, it may be
useful to deactivate this option.
RBlock popups
Popups are windows (usually with advertisements) which are displayed automatically when you call up a website. You can
block these displays.
REnable JavaScript
JavaScript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the website.
REnable cookies
Some websites save information in small
text files (cookies) in COMAND Online. You
can determine whether cookies may be
stored.
RCharacter size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
RCharacter code
Select Character size or Character
code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a setting using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If you change the settings, the websites
may not be displayed correctly.
Deleting private data
Select Delete private data and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Online and Internet functions
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Internet
206
Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates
which setting is active.
or
Online and Internet functions
Select Delete all data on exiting and
press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option
Function
All
Deletes all private
data.
Cache
Deletes data in the
temporary storage.
Cookies
Deletes cookies that
are created by websites which you have
called up.
Websites visited Deletes all websites
visited (path).
ODelete all
data on exiting
If this function is
activated O, all private data is deleted
when you exit the
Internet browser.
i If you reset COMAND Online to the factory settings (reset function), these settings are deleted (Y page 49).
Calling up the carousel view and closing the Internet browser
To call up the carousel view: press the
% back button for longer than two seconds.
X To close the Internet browser: press the
% back button again for longer than two
seconds.
207
Features of your COMAND Online ...
Radio mode and DAB radio mode ....
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........
Music search .....................................
MUSIC REGISTER ..............................
208
208
214
227
230
Audio
Operation with Bluetooth® audio .... 234
Media Interface mode ...................... 240
Audio AUX mode ............................... 247
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
208
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
DAB radio mode: you will hear the last station played from the last ensemble selected.
i Repeatedly pressing the $ function
button switches between the FM, MW, SW
and LW wavebands in that order. It then
calls up DAB radio mode. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode.
Audio
Switching on with the audio menu
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
Introduction
i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle
may seriously impair radio and DAB radio
reception.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed
for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined
into so-called ensembles and transmitted on
a single frequency. Digital radio stations can
be transmitted nationally, regionally or
locally.
Some stations only transmit programmes at
certain times. If you have selected a station
that has subsequently been removed from
the ensemble, it will no longer be received.
You will continue to receive the other programmes in the ensemble. You will then need
to select a different programme.
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If radio mode or DAB radio mode was the
last mode selected, it will now be active.
If another audio mode is switched on, you
can now switch to radio mode in the audio
menu.
You can select DAB radio mode in the radio
display.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
i DAB cannot be received everywhere in
Europe.
: Current audio operating mode
Switching to radio mode and DAB
radio mode
Switching on with the function button
Press the $ function button.
The radio or DAB radio display appears.
Radio mode: you will hear the last station
played on the last waveband selected.
; Main function bar
= Audio menu
Select Radio by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
FM radio display
: Waveband and frequency of the selected
DAB radio display
: Name of the ensemble to which the selec-
station
; Station name or station frequency of the
selected station
= Memory position of a station
? Radio text plus display (if available)
A Radio mode menu bar
To switch on DAB radio mode: select FM
in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
ted station belongs
; Name of the selected station
= Memory position of a station
? Radio text plus display (if available)
A DAB radio mode menu bar
i If reception is poor (e.g. in tunnels or
mountain valleys), affected stations are
shown in grey. Playback of the currently
selected station is interrupted. As soon as
the reception quality is adequate, displays
and playback return to normal.
Switching wavebands
Option 1
You can switch the radio between the FM,
MW, LW and SW wavebands.
X Press the $ function button repeatedly
until the desired waveband is selected.
Select DAB and press W to confirm.
Option 2
Select FM, DAB, MW, SW or LW in the radio
display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a waveband and press W to confirm.
You will hear the last station played on the
selected waveband.
209
Audio
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
210
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
i In the MW, LW and SW wavebands,
COMAND Online shows the station frequency instead of the station name.
Ensembles
Audio
An ensemble consists of multiple radio programmes. Every ensemble is transmitted in a
certain area (national, regional or local) in the
same way as a traditional AM/FM radio station.
Switching to an FM station automatically
Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the
COMAND controller while the display/
selection window for the radio display is
active.
or
Press the E or F button.
The needle jumps to the left or right.
To make a selection in the station list:
select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Station list by pressing W.
The station list appears.
If the reception of a DAB radio station deteriorates, COMAND Online automatically
changes to the corresponding FM station. For
this to happen, the following conditions must
be met:
Rthe
FM station's frequency is available.
Station fix menu item
(Y page 212) is switched off.
Rthe
i If you want to use this function, do not
switch to FM radio mode.
If there is no reception, the display shows the
No reception message.
Example: radio mode
: Currently selected station
; Memory slot in station presets
Setting a station
Setting a station from the station list
The station list is available in the FM waveband and in DAB radio mode.
Radio mode: the station list contains all the
stations that can currently be received and is
sorted alphabetically. For stations without a
programme service, the list shows the frequency instead of the name.
DAB radio mode: the station list contains
stations from all ensembles that can currently
be received. It shows the current programme
and a programme preview if the station operator supports this function. The station list is
sorted alphabetically.
Example: DAB radio mode
: Alphabetical browser
; DAB radio station
= Current programme
? Start and end times of the programme
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
Select the station by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To call up the programme preview: slide
VY the COMAND controller.
The next programmes are shown for the
displayed DAB radio stations.
X Switch back by sliding XV.
To activate the alphabetical browser:
slide XV the COMAND controller.
X Select the initial letters of the desired station name by turning cVd the COMAND
controller.
The station list changes to the appropriate
station.
X Switch back by sliding VY.
To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Setting a station using the station
search function
In radio mode, the station search function is
only available for the MW, LW and SW wavebands.
X Press the E or F button.
Station search scans up or down and stops
at the next station.
To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
or
Press W the COMAND controller when the
display/selection window is active.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected station is stored.
Select a station by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
or
Press a number key, such as l.
To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
Setting stations by entering the frequency manually
This function is available in radio mode.
X Option 1: press the l button.
Option 2: select Radio in the radio display
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Frequency entry and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, an input
menu will appear.
Enter a frequency using the number keys.
COMAND Online sets the frequency
entered.
Setting stations via the station presets
Waveband
Frequency
Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.
l.
FM (VHF)
87.5 – 108.0 MHz
Directly in the station presets: select
Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
MW (medium wave)
531 – 1620 kHz
SW (short wave)
5800 – 6250 kHz
LW (long wave)
153 – 282 kHz
i You can only enter currently permitted
numbers.
Audio
211
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
212
There are 10 presets available for each waveband as well as for DAB radio mode.
X Quick save: press and hold a number key,
e.g. l, until you hear a tone.
The station is stored.
The search starts at the lowest frequency.
COMAND Online stores any stations found,
beginning with preset 1. The storing process
ends once the highest frequency has been
reached or once 10 stations have been found.
Any stations stored manually under the presets will be lost. COMAND Online may not
occupy all memory slots when storing.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
when the display/selection window is
active.
X Select Autostore in the presets by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
i If you enter a frequency in the MW, SW or
LW wavebands that is outside the frequency range, COMAND Online sets the
next lower frequency.
Storing a station
Audio
Storing stations manually
Directly in the station presets: press W
the COMAND controller when the display/
selection window is active.
or
Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
In both cases, the station presets appear.
The # dot indicates under which preset
the currently selected station is stored.
Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
In both cases, COMAND Online searches
for stations that can be received. You will
see a message to this effect. The available
stations are automatically stored in the preset positions.
To cancel storing: select Cancel and
press W to confirm.
Radio Data System (RDS)
General notes
Station presets in DAB radio mode
Select a preset by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press and hold
W until you hear a tone.
The station is stored under the preset.
Storing stations automatically
This function automatically stores stations
with adequate reception under the presets.
The Radio Data System (RDS) provides inaudible additional information in the FM waveband. The system consists of a listening
receiver and a monitoring receiver.
The monitoring receiver permanently scans
the FM waveband and collects certain data
from all receivable stations. This includes, for
instance, reception quality and RDS data
such as programme names and alternative
frequencies. COMAND Online stores the data
and constantly updates the memory. The
audio receiver is therefore able to switch
automatically to an alternative frequency with
a better signal.
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
transmit RDS data.
Switching RDS on/off
You can use the Frequency fix (radio mode)
or Station fix (DAB mode) functions to prevent
COMAND Online from switching between the
alternative frequencies of a station. This is
useful, for example, when the same content
is broadcast with a time delay, or when there
is interference on one of the frequencies.
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Frequency fix or Station fix by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
Frequency fix on O or off ª.
Once traffic announcements have been
switched on, COMAND Online selects an RDS
station.
Traffic Programme is retrieved from:
Rthe
currently selected FM station
RDS station from the network of the
currently selected FM station
Rthe RDS station with the best reception
quality
When traffic announcements are switched
on, a traffic announcement will interrupt the
audio signal from the currently activated
audio or video source.
Ran
i Telephone conversations and navigation
announcements are not interrupted.
A display message appears in the display in
all audio operating modes.
Interrupting a traffic announcement
During a traffic announcement:
Traffic Programme
Note
Many FM stations transmit traffic announcements (TA). You can also hear these in DAB
radio mode.
Switching traffic announcements on/
off
Option 1: select Radio by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The tick next to TA indicates that traffic
announcement reception is switched on.
You see the TA symbol in the status bar.
X Select TA and press W to confirm.
TA is switched on or off, depending on the
previous status.
X Option 2: on COMAND Online or on the
multifunction steering wheel, press and
hold the 8 button until the TA icon lights
up or goes out in the status bar.
A warning tone sounds.
On COMAND Online or on the multifunction
steering wheel, briefly press the 8 button.
or
Press the 9, : or 9 button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
COMAND Online switches back to the
audio source that was selected before the
announcement. Any subsequent new
announcements will continue to interrupt
the audio source.
Radio text/radio text plus
Messages in the display
The function is available in FM mode and in
DAB radio mode.
Radio text/radio text plus consists of additionally transmitted data, e.g. information on
the current programme, which is displayed in
the COMAND display.
If the station supports radio text plus, the
artist and track are displayed.
Audio
i RDS only functions for stations which
213
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
214
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Audio
Radio text plus (display: artist and track)
To show/hide the artist and track:
select Radio in the radio display by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display artist and track and
press W to confirm.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
To display radio text: select Info in the
corresponding radio display by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
If the station supports radio text and information is available, the system displays it.
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These
laser beams may damage your retina. There
is a risk of injury.
You must not open the casing. Always have
maintenance work and repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Handling discs while driving will distract you
from traffic conditions. You could then lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is stationary.
Bear in mind that, at a speed of only
50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering a
distance of 14 m per second.
Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs
Notes
If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.
If neither side is printed, the side to be played
should face downwards. CDs/DVDs with
copy protection may not be able to be played
by the system.
Radio text (display for additional information on
programme)
To return to the radio display: confirm
Info by pressing W.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
i If a medium contains other files in addition to music files, the loading time before
the first track starts to play may be longer.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Press the 8 eject button.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
ejected.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
X Insert a disc into the slot.
The disc is drawn in and playback starts if
the disc has been inserted correctly and it
is a permissible type.
Select a magazine tray to be filled by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
Press a number key, e.g. j.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
magazine tray. You see the Please
wait... message.
You then see the Please insert disc
 message.
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.
The DVD changer loads the disc into the
selected magazine tray. The Loading
disc ... message appears.
Audio
Inserting a disc into the single DVD
drive
Ejecting a disc from the single DVD
drive
Press the 8 eject button.
Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it
is drawn in again automatically after a short
while and reloaded.
Inserting discs into the DVD changer
The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with
six trays.
X To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine
tray: press the V load/eject button.
A menu shows the current load status of
the magazine trays. The last tray selected
is identified by a red digit.
215
i It may take some time for the disc to be
loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no
disc is inserted for approximately 20 seconds, the display returns to the magazine
menu.
The DVD changer plays the disc if:
Rit
Rit
has been inserted correctly
is a permissible type of disc
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
216
To cancel loading: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
i If you cancel loading with the % back
button, the system loads and plays the last
CD you inserted.
Ejecting discs from the DVD changer
Audio
: Full magazine tray (eject function is avail-
able)
; Empty magazine tray (disc can be inser-
ted)
To exit the menu: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
If you remove one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.
Playback continues once the disc has been
ejected.
X To eject a CD/DVD: press the V load/
eject button.
The magazine menu appears. The magazine
tray with the current disc is highlighted.
or
Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
To fill empty magazine trays: press the
V load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
X Select Fill empty slots.
You see the Please wait... message.
COMAND Online switches to the next free
magazine tray. You then see the Please
insert disc  message.
i Do not insert a disc into the magazine tray
until you have seen this prompt.
X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.
You see the Please wait... message.
Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray. You see
the Please insert disc  message.
X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded.
The DVD changer plays the last disc you
loaded if it has been inserted correctly and
it is a permissible type.
: Eject possible
; Data medium type
= Disc name (only if stored on the disc)
? Current disc
Select a magazine tray containing a disc by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
or
Press a number key, e.g. j.
You see the message: Ejecting disc
.... You then see the following message:
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
217
To exit the menu: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
or
Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
COMAND Online will draw it in automatically after a short while and load it again.
Inserting and removing an SD memory card
General notes
COMAND Online supports SD memory cards
(Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards
(Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXC
memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended
Capacity.
i Not all memory cards available on the
market are designed for the temperatures
which may be reached in the vehicle.
If the SD memory card is no longer in use,
you should remove it from
COMAND Online. High temperatures can
damage the card.
Due to the wide range of SD memory cards
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory
card.
The readable storage capacity depends on
the memory card used. You can obtain further information at any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
To eject all CDs/DVDs: press the V
load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
Select Eject all by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The DVD changer ejects the last disc selected. You see the Ejecting disc ...
message.
X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you
see the Please remove disc . message.
The DVD changer switches to the next loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
Inserting an SD memory card
Insert the memory card into the slot on the
control panel until it engages in place. The
side with the contacts must face downwards and point towards the slot.
If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see
a message to this effect.
The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
first MP3 track is then played. An hourglass
symbol indicates that further tracks are
being loaded in the background.
Audio
Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
218
Ejecting an SD memory card
Press the memory card.
The memory card is ejected.
X Remove the memory card from the slot.
or
Connect a USB device (Y page 218).
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Switching on with the function button
Audio
Connecting a USB device
The USB port is located in the stowage compartment in the centre console.
Electrical consumption at this connection
must not exceed a continuous current of
500 mA. If the electrical consumption is
higher, use a separate source to provide
power for the USB device (e.g.
12 V power supply).
X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to
the USB port.
If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see
a message to this effect.
The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
first MP3 track is then played. An hourglass
symbol indicates that further tracks are
being loaded in the background.
i Due to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all brands of USB device.
Information about suitable USB devices
can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
MP3 players must support Media Transfer
Protocol (MTP). The MTP mode must be
active.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
RAudio CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3
DVD in the DVD changer or single DVD
drive (disc mode)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
ROperation with Bluetooth® audio
X Select an audio medium from the media list
(Y page 220).
Switching on with the audio menu
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The last active audio source is now activated.
You can activate a different audio source
using the audio menu.
Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Disc, Memory card, Music Regis‐
ter, USB storage or Media Interface
and press W to confirm.
This switches to the desired audio source.
Select an audio medium from the media list
(Y page 220).
Switching to audio CD/audio DVD or
MP3 mode
Inserting or connecting a data medium
Insert CDs/DVDs (Y page 214)
or
Insert an SD memory card (Y page 217)
Press the h function button one or more
times.
Example display: audio CD mode
Example display: MP3 mode
: CD cover (if available)
: Cover (if available)
; Gracenote data found, then the elapsed
; Track time
track time
Track number and track name (if stored
on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote®
data is available)
Graphic time and track display
Disc type, disc position in the media list
and disc name (if stored on the disc as CD
text or if Gracenote® data is available)
Artist (if stored on the disc as CD text or
if Gracenote® data is available)
CD mode menu
Example display: audio DVD mode
219
Audio
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
= Track number and name
? Graphic time and track display
A Medium type, position of medium in the
media list, current folder or current album
B Artist (if available)
C MP3 mode menu
i If no Media Interface is connected during
operation with a DVD changer, C displays
Changer instead of Media(Y page 240).
Pause function
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode
To pause playback: briefly press the
8 button.
The , symbol appears at the top left in
the status bar.
X To continue playback: briefly press the
8 button again.
The , symbol disappears.
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number
? Graphic time and track display
A Disc type, disc position in the media list,
disc name (only if stored on the disc)
B Audio DVD mode menu
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
220
Only in audio DVD mode
Audio
To pause playback: switch on audio DVD
mode (Y page 218).
X Select Ë by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Ë symbol changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The Ì symbol changes
to Ë.
Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discs
Selecting via the media list
Media list when equipped with a DVD changer
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 218).
To interrupt playback: select É by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Ë symbol changes to Ì. The
É symbol remains highlighted.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to
confirm.
or
Select É and confirm by pressing W
twice in rapid succession.
Ì is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback starts at the beginning of the
DVD.
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select
Media or Changer by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select
Media by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates
the current medium being played.
The media list shows the discs currently
available.
View in ::
magazine tray not shown
RI magazine tray shown
RG
To switch the display: select 1...6
changer by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous setting, the
magazine trays are shown or not shown.
i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears
next to the corresponding magazine tray.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
221
i If you select a video DVD, the system
switches to video DVD mode
(Y page 259).
Selecting a track using the number keypad
When the display/selection window is
active, press a number key, e.g. n.
The medium at the corresponding position
in the media list is loaded and then played.
Select the data medium by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The following tables list the selection options
in the media list for the respective equipment
variants.
For DVD changer
Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable
data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3
DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has
been playing for more than 8 seconds. If
the track has been playing for less than 8
seconds, it skips to the start of the previous
track.
If the Random tracks or Random folder
playback option has been selected, the
track order is random.
Make selection on the multifunction steering wheel and view in the multifunction display; see separate vehicle Owner's Manual.
MUSIC REGISTER, position 8
USB storage device, position 9
Media Interface, position 0
Bluetooth® audio
DVD drive, position 1: readable data media
are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs,
audio DVDs and video DVDs
To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
Memory card, position 7
For a single DVD drive
Audio
Media list showing all magazine trays
Memory card, position 2
Selecting a track using the number keypad
MUSIC REGISTER, position 3
USB storage device, position 4
Media Interface, position 5
Press the ¯ key on the number keypad.
A numerical entry field appears. The number of positions offered corresponds to the
number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only
Bluetooth® audio, position 6
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
222
numbers that correspond to a track number on the CD/DVD can be entered.
X Enter the desired track number using the
number keys.
The track plays after the last possible number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number key for
more than 2 seconds completes the entry,
and the corresponding track is played.
Audio
Selecting a track using music search
available music data within the desired category.
You will find further information on searching
for music in the "Music search" section
(Y page 227).
X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,
select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
Example: current track list
Select Current track list, Folder or a
category and press W to confirm.
Select music via categories (e.g. albums,
artists etc.) with the music search function.
If you select a category, COMAND Online
starts a search for track information if the following conditions are fulfilled:
Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected.
Fast forward/rewind
track information from these data carriers is not yet contained in the COMAND
music database.
COMAND Online imports track information
from the following data carriers:
Rdisc
Rthe
(audio CD/DVD/MP3)
Rmemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is completed. COMAND Online stores the music data
in its own database. You can now select the
Select the track by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The basic display appears and the track is
played.
While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
Gracenote Media Database
Introduction
This function is only available in audio CD
mode.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
223
Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 218).
Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
The # dot indicates the current selection
for the display.
There is a version of Gracenote® music recognition technology on the COMAND Online
hard drive. You will recognise this by the logo
in the bottom right-hand corner of certain
audio displays.
Many audio CDs contain CD text.
COMAND Online uses the information contained therein to display the artist, album and
track name.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, COMAND Online can use the
Gracenote® Media Database to identify
unknown audio tracks when in audio CD
mode. This is only possible if the relevant
information is saved in the Gracenote Media
Database and if the Gracenote Media Database function is activated.
If this is the case, COMAND Online will display
the corresponding data such as artist, album
and track name in the relevant displays and
lists.
Selecting Gracenote® data to be displayed
If several entries exist for the CD of a particular artist, you can select which of the entries
should be shown.
If the inserted CD does not contain any
Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media
Database menu item is shown in grey and
cannot be selected.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching the Gracenote® data display
on/off
Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 218).
Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
To switch off the display: select None and
press W to confirm.
In the basic display, Track 1, Track 2 etc.
are shown instead of the Gracenote® data,
for example (Y page 219).
To switch on the display: select an entry
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Audio
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
224
Audio
Updating Gracenote® music recognition technology and the Gracenote
Media Database
Due to the release of new CDs, the digital data
on the Gracenote Media Database must be
updated. Optimum functionality can only be
attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music
recognition technology. Information about
new versions can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
You can have your music recognition software updated there with a DVD, or you can
update it yourself.
i The Gracenote Media Database is updated in conjunction with the navigation system's digital map (Y page 124).
Displaying the track and album
Press the z button.
The current track and album are displayed
in a window.
Selecting a group (DVD audio)
The content of an audio DVD can be divided
into up to nine groups. The availability and
type of group depends on the respective DVD.
A group can contain music in different sound
qualities (stereo and multichannel formats,
for example), or bonus tracks.
Each group can contain up to 99 tracks.
If an audio DVD only contains one audio format, the Group menu item(s) cannot be selected.
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 218).
X Select DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Group by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the group currently
selected.
X Select the desired group by turning cVd
and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller or press the % back button.
Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)
COMAND Online can also display the album
name and artist (metadata) during playback
if this information has been entered into the
system.
For all media that contain MP3 data (e.g. MP3
CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you
can determine whether:
Rthe
metadata contained in the tags of the
encoded music data should be displayed
Rthe file and directory names should be displayed during playback
X To display the album and artist name:
select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display track information and
press W to confirm.
Selecting an active partition (USB
mass storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB mass
storage devices when the storage device is
partitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported.
X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select active partition and press W to
confirm.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Notes on MP3 mode
To select options: switch on audio CD/
DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 218).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal track sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
The following options are available to you:
General notes
RNormal
RISO
track sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).
In MP3 mode, the track order is determined
by the order in which the tracks are written
to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.
Alphabetical order is the most common.
Once all the tracks in a folder have been
played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)
You will hear the tracks in the current playlist or currently active folder (including all
subfolders) in random order.
i The Normal track sequence option is
automatically selected when you change
the disc you are currently listening to or
when you select a different medium. If an
option is selected, it remains selected after
COMAND Online is switched on or off.
Depending on the volume and format of the
MP3 data, the length of time required for
reading the data may increase.
Permissible data carriers
RCD-R
and CD-RW
and DVD-RW
RDVD+R and DVD+RW
RSD memory card
RUSB storage device
RDVD-R
Audio
Playback options
225
Permissible file systems
9660/Joliet standard for CDs
for audio and video DVDs
RFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memory
card and USB storage media
RUDF
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how COMAND Online will
process the CD. COMAND Online plays only
one session and gives priority to the audio CD
session.
If possible, only play CDs that have been written in one session on COMAND Online.
File structure of a disc
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, the tracks can be organised in
folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.
The disc may contain no more than eight
directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level
will not be recognised by the system.
i COMAND Online loads up to 15,000
tracks from the SD memory card or USB
storage medium.
Audio
226
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Track and file names
Permissible bit and sampling rates
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, you can assign names to the
tracks and folders.
COMAND Online uses these names accordingly for the display. Folders that contain data
other than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND Online.
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root
directory itself, the root directory will also be
treated as a folder. COMAND Online will then
show the name of the root directory as the
folder name.
You should observe the following when
assigning track names:
COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
types:
Rtrack
names must have at least one character.
Rtrack names must have the extension
"mp3" or "wma".
Rthere must be a full stop between the track
name and the extension.
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
Rfixed
and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s
to 320 kbit/s
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND Online supports WMA files of the
following types:
Rfixed
bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s
rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND Online does not support WMA files
of the following types:
Rsampling
RDRM
(Digital Rights Management) encrypted files
RVariable bit rate
RWMA Pro
R5.1 Surround
i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates may cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function.
COMAND supports the following formats:
Notes on copyright
RMPEG1
MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play
back are generally subject to copyright protection in accordance with the applicable
international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply
with these.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or if the
copyright holder has granted you permission,
these restrictions do not apply.
Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9
(WMA) without copy protection
Microsoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8
and V9 (WMA)
Radditional music files in AAC format with
the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes
music files with the extension .m4p
i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other
music files in these audio formats stored on
the disc, the loading process may require a
longer time before the first track is played.
i The MP3 audio encoding method is under
licence from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integrierte Schaltungen – Institute for Integrated
Circuits) and Thomson.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
Music search
! COMAND Online is designed to play discs
Calling up the category list
which comply with the EN 60908 standard.
Therefore, you can only use discs with a
maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the device.
Only use round discs with a diameter of
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of
8 cm, even with an adapter.
Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the CD standard and therefore may
not be able to be played by COMAND Online.
You may encounter playback problems when
playing copied discs. There is a wide range of
data carriers, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is
no guarantee that the system will be able to
play discs that you have copied yourself.
There may be playback problems if you play
CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of
this type do not conform to the currently
applicable standards.
i On many DVD audio discs, the last track
does not contain any music. If
COMAND Online therefore switches to the
next disc, it is normal system behaviour and
does not mean that there is a malfunction.
i COMAND Online is able to play back
audio CDs in multichannel audio format.
Category list
Switch on an audio source and call up the
basic display, e.g. MP3 mode
(Y page 218).
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
The categories are displayed according to the
data available. The categories Current
tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available)
and Photos (if available) are already
assigned. The other available categories are
filled by the music search.
Selecting a category
Starting a music search
Select music via categories (e.g. albums,
artists etc.) with the music search function.
If you select a category, COMAND Online
starts a music search under the following
conditions:
Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected.
Rthe music tracks on these data carriers are
not yet in the COMAND music database.
COMAND Online reads music tracks from the
following data carriers:
Rdisc
227
Audio
Music search
(audio CD/DVD/MP3)
card
Rmemory
Music search
228
RMUSIC
RUSB
REGISTER
storage device
Select Albums in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available albums are displayed alphabetically. If there is a cover available for an
album, it is displayed in front of the album
name.
Audio
Selecting a track
Select a category in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The Reading data... message appears.
The search may take some time, depending
on the number of tracks available.
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is completed. Playback then starts with the previously
active audio source.
X To cancel the music search: confirm
Cancel by pressing W.
Select Tracks in the category list
(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The available tracks are displayed.
Selecting a year of publication
Selecting artists
Select Artists in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available artists are displayed alphabetically.
Selecting an album
Select Year in the category list
(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The genre list is displayed.
Music search
Select a genre, e.g. pop, and press W to
confirm.
The track list is displayed.
X Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts.
229
Selecting via keyword search
Select Keyword search in the category list
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
To change the character set used in the
character bar: highlight Select by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A list of available character sets is shown.
Selecting composers
Select Composers in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The available composers are displayed
alphabetically.
Audio
Selecting music genres
Select Genres in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available music genres are displayed
alphabetically.
Selecting a cover
Select Select by cover in the category
list (Y page 227) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The available covers are displayed in alphabetical order of the artists.
Select the desired cover by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The corresponding album is played.
Select the desired character set and press
W to confirm.
X Enter characters and confirm the entry.
Character entry (Y page 34).
Depending on the entry, the hits are shown
in a list.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
MUSIC REGISTER
230
MUSIC REGISTER
General notes
! Retain the original music files in a secure
Audio
location. An error in COMAND Online might
result in the loss of the music files stored
in the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is
not liable for any loss of data.
Select an entry, e.g. Artists, and press
W to confirm.
The album and cover (if available) are displayed.
You can store music files in a compressed
format in the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 231). The memory has a capacity of
10 GB.
Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER
MUSIC REGISTER basic display
Confirm the album with W.
The tracks on the album are displayed.
Example: MUSIC REGISTER
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number and name
? Graphic time and track display
A Position of the medium in the media list
Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts and the basic display
appears.
and name of the medium, followed by the
current playback option (no display for
Normal track sequence)
B Artist
C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar
MUSIC REGISTER
Press the h function button repeatedly
until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
ROperation with Bluetooth® audio
If music files are available, playback begins at
the point last listened to.
If there are no music files, you will see a message to this effect.
X Confirm the message by pressing W the
COMAND controller and then copy the
music files to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 231).
RMemory
Switching on with the audio menu
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If the MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode
selected, it is now switched on.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in
the audio menu.
Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Music Register and press W to
confirm.
Switching on using the number keys
Press the r (for a DVD changer) or
m (for a single DVD drive) number key.
The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
Copying music data to the MUSIC
REGISTER
Introduction
You can copy music files in the file formats
MP3, WMA and AAC (with the file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from the
following media:
Rdiscs
in a DVD changer or a single DVD
drive
Rmemory card
RUSB memory
i While copying, several functions will not
be available. If this is the case, you will see
a message to this effect.
1. Selecting a data medium
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Copy MP3 music files and press
W to confirm.
The media list appears. A data medium
from which files can be copied is selected
automatically.
Select the data medium by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The data medium is loaded.
If the data carrier contains music files that
can be copied, you see a menu.
Audio
Switching on with the function button
231
232
MUSIC REGISTER
Audio
2. Selecting music files
To select all music files: select All
tracks and press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
This function copies all music files on the
selected data carrier. The icon in front of
All tracks is filled in and all following
entries have a tick O beside them.
To select a folder: turn cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A tick O next to the folder entry highlights
the selection.
3. Confirming your selection
Select Continue by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The copying menu appears.
4. Starting the copying process
! Under no circumstances should you
remove the medium while you are copying
data from it (SD memory card, USB storage
device, CD/DVD). Doing so will generate
unusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER.
In the example, music files are copied from
the memory card to the MUSIC REGISTER.
X To select a target folder: select Desti‐
nation folder by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Folder and press W to confirm.
The folder is selected O.
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
Confirm Start by pressing W.
Copying begins. The progress bar indicates
the status of the copying procedure.
i It may take some time for the copying
process to be completed, depending on the
amount of data. If there is not enough memory space, you will see a message to this
effect.
Once copying is complete, you hear the first
track of the copied album. The MUSIC REGISTER display appears. Now you can copy
more music files to the MUSIC REGISTER.
X To cancel the copying process: select
Cancel and press W to confirm.
Music files are stored in the MUSIC REGISTER up until the point of cancellation.
Deleting all music files
! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not
use COMAND Online during this time.
This function deletes all music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER.
MUSIC REGISTER
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Delete all music files and
press W to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, all music files are deleted.
You see the Please wait... message.
You will then see the Data deleted message.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
X Select a track in a category (Y page 227).
Example: opening a folder
Select Folder in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You see the contents of the current folder.
Calling up memory space information
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Memory info and press W to confirm.
The following is displayed:
Rstorage capacity
Ravailable memory
Roccupied memory
Rcontent (folders, tracks)
Music search
Introduction
The music search finds tracks via all available
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
The music search covers the following media:
Rdisc
(audio CD/DVD/MP3)
card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
Rmemory
The name of the current folder is at the top
and the track currently playing is indicated by
a # dot.
To switch to the next folder up: press the
% back button or slide XV the
COMAND controller.
Changing the folder/track name
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Rename / delete files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press
W to confirm.
X Select Change and press W to confirm.
Audio
233
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
234
Enter a name for the folder/track
(Y page 34).
X To save the changes: select ¬ and
press W to confirm.
Deleting folders/tracks
Audio
Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Rename / delete files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press
W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are
deleted. You see the Please wait...
message. You will then see the Data
deleted message.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal
track sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)
The tracks in the currently active folder or
the current track list are played in a random
order.
To select options: switch to the MUSIC
REGISTER (Y page 230).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option and press W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal track sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
i The Normal track sequence option is
automatically selected when you change
the disc you are currently listening to or
when you select a different medium. If an
option is selected, it remains selected after
COMAND Online is switched on or off.
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Preconditions for the Bluetooth®
audio device
Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Bluetooth®-capable audio device. Observe the
information in the Bluetooth® audio device's
operating instructions.
Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, you
should check your Bluetooth® audio device
for the following:
RBluetooth®
audio profile
The Bluetooth® audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio
profiles.
RBluetooth® visibility
Certain Bluetooth® audio devices require
more than simply activating the Bluetooth® function. In addition, your device
must be made "visible" to other devices.
RBluetooth® device name
This device name is predetermined but can
usually be changed. To make a clear selection of the Bluetooth® device possible,
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
data transmission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
data playback
i Not all Bluetooth® audio devices available
on the market are equally suitable.
Information on suitable Bluetooth® audio
devices and on connecting Bluetooth®
audio devices to COMAND Online:
The mobile phone is then entered:
the Bluetooth® telephone list
(Y page 134)
Rin the Bluetooth® device list
(Y page 235)
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorising a
mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony
(Y page 134).
Rin
Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth® audio device
Ris
available from your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre
Ror visit the website http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Activate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility on the Bluetooth® audio device.
Preconditions in COMAND Online
Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND Online(Y page 46).
Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices
Example: Bluetooth® device list
: Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth® audio function in range
; Bluetooth® audio player not within range
but previously authorised (symbol
appears in grey)
General notes
Before using your Bluetooth® audio device
with COMAND Online for the first time, you
will need to authorise it.
When you authorise a new Bluetooth® audio
device, it is connected automatically. Connection involves first searching for a Bluetooth® audio device and then authorising it.
You can authorise up to fifteen Bluetooth®
devices.
i If you authorise a mobile phone that supports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and
AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected automatically.
The Bluetooth® device list displays all authorised devices, whether they are within range
or not. After a device search, devices which
are within range but not authorised are also
displayed.
Audio
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you customise the device name.
235
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
236
Audio
Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
(Y page 238).
If you see the No Bluetooth audio
device authorised message, you will
need to authorise the Bluetooth® audio
device first.
X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list
by pressing W the COMAND controller.
X To search: confirm Search for BT
audio devices by pressing the COMAND
controller W.
COMAND Online searches for Bluetooth®
audio devices within range and adds them
to the Bluetooth® device list. Bluetooth®
audio devices are detected if they support
the Bluetooth® audio profiles (A2DP,
AVRCP).
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
and on the Bluetooth® audio device are the
same, confirm Yes by pressing W.
If you select Yes, authorisation continues
and the Bluetooth® audio device is connected. Playback starts.
If you select No, authorisation will be cancelled.
i The Bluetooth® audio device must support Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection
via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND Online creates a six-digit code,
which is simultaneously displayed on both
devices that are to be connected.
External authorisation
To authorise: select an unauthorised Bluetooth® audio device from the list
(: in the example) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Authorise and press W to confirm.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
used, you now have two options for continuing with authorisation.
X Option 1: enter the passkey (Y page 134).
After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and
starts playing.
X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the
digit codes displayed in COMAND Online
If COMAND Online does not find your Bluetooth® audio device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth®
audio device. In this case, check whether your
Bluetooth® audio device can locate the
COMAND Online system. The Bluetooth®
device name of COMAND Online is MB Blue‐
tooth.
Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
(Y page 238).
X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list
by pressing W the COMAND controller.
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
To search: confirm Connect via BT
audio device by pressing the COMAND
controller W.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
X To authorise: start the authorisation on
the Bluetooth® audio device; see the operating instructions of the Bluetooth® audio
device.
After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and
starts playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must first be started on the device
itself so that COMAND Online can play the
audio files.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio
device
The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following circumstances:
Rone
of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a
Bluetooth® audio player (if this function is
supported by the mobile phone).
Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic
connection itself.
A Bluetooth® audio player without telephone
functions is not automatically reconnected,
even if it was the last device connected.
If the No Bluetooth audio device con‐
nected message appears, you have two
options to connect a Bluetooth® audio
device:
Connecting the last device
Confirm Connect last device in the
basic display by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
If COMAND Online can locate the Bluetooth® audio device, it will be connected
and will start playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must first be started on the device
itself so that COMAND Online can play the
audio files.
Connecting a device from a list
Select BT audio by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list
by pressing W the COMAND controller.
Select a Bluetooth® audio device by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
If COMAND Online can locate the Bluetooth® audio device, it will be connected
and will start playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must first be started on the device
itself so that COMAND Online can play the
audio files.
Bluetooth® audio device and simultaneous search for mobile phones
During the search for mobile phones, the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is
terminated (Y page 133). In the Bluetooth®
audio basic display, you will see the No Blue‐
tooth audio device connected message
and the Connect last device menu item
cannot be selected.
Displaying details
Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
Audio
237
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Audio
238
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
Ravailability status (shown after an
update)
Rauthorisation status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
De-authorising (de-registering) a Bluetooth® audio device
Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears, asking whether you
really wish to de-authorise this device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® device list.
If you select No, the process will be cancelled.
i Before re-authorising the Bluetooth®
audio device, you should also delete the
device name MB Bluetooth from your
Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list.
See the Bluetooth® audio device's operating instructions.
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
The Bluetooth® audio basic display
Example: Bluetooth® audio basic display
: Track name
; Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
= Album name
? Sound settings
A Media list
B Artist
C To stop É or start Ì playback
D To connect a Bluetooth® audio device, to
switch traffic announcements on/off, to
increase the volume on COMAND Online
E Bluetooth® audio data carrier type
F Data carrier position in the media list
i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected
supports metadata and corresponding data
is available, then the artist, track and album
name can be displayed.
Using the Bluetooth® audio basic display
To connect Bluetooth® audio devices
(Y page 235)
or
Reconnect the Bluetooth® audio device
(Y page 237).
COMAND Online activates the Bluetooth®
audio device. The basic display appears
and the device starts playing.
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Using the function button
239
Restarting playback after stopping
Press the h function button one or more
times.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
ROperation with Bluetooth® audio
Using the media list
Select Bluetooth audio in the media list
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm (Y page 220).
COMAND Online activates the connected
device. You will see a message to this
effect. The basic display then appears.
Starting/stopping playback
To start playback: select Ì by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Playback starts. É is selected.
To stop playback: select É by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
To continue playback: select Ì by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A message appears. É is selected.
During the search for mobile phones, the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is
terminated (Y page 133). In the Bluetooth®
audio (Y page 238) basic display, you will see
the No Bluetooth audio device connec‐
ted. message, and the Connect last
device menu item cannot be selected.
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth®
audio device can be reconnected.
X Confirm Connect last device by pressing W.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
need to start playback manually.
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
audio device paused message.
To start playback: select Ì by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
Audio
RMemory
240
Media Interface mode
Audio
Selecting a track
This function is not supported by all Bluetooth® audio devices.
X To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the E or F button on
COMAND Online.
or
X Press the 9 or : button briefly on
the multifunction steering wheel.
X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steering wheel until the desired track is reached.
If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed increases
after a short time.
Selecting playback options
If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the
corresponding function, the following options
are available:
RNormal
track sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder
have been played, the tracks in the next
folder are played.
RRandom tracks
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select the option by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
If you select Random tracks, you will see
a corresponding symbol in the display/
selection window.
Increasing the volume on COMAND
Online
Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Volume and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Information about sound settings
(Y page 31)
Information about Traffic Programme
(Y page 213)
You will find further information in the "Audio
AUX mode" section (Y page 247)
Media Interface mode
Connection options
Overview
The connection sockets are located in the
stowage compartment in the centre console.
Device-specific adapter cables are required
to connect external devices to the Media
Interface. Country-specific versions are supplied with the Media Interface (Y page 241).
You can connect the following data carriers
to COMAND Online via the Media Interface:
RiPod®
RiPhone®
Rcertain
MP3 players
Media Interface mode
241
i Store individual parts in a safe place.
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connection cables.
i iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California,
USA.
i MP3 players that support MTP (Media
Supported devices
For further details and a list of supported
devices, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre or visit the website at http://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
connect. Then, follow the instructions in the
"Media Interface" section.
Connecting an external device
Do not leave external devices in the vehicle.
At extreme temperatures, they cannot be
guaranteed to function correctly (see the
operating instructions of the device in question). Examples of extreme temperatures are
direct sunlight or very low outside temperatures. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage to external devices.
i Never connect more than one device at a
time. You will otherwise not be able to play
back from the external device.
USB hubs (devices with several USB connections) are not supported.
: 4-pin socket for 3.5 mm stereo jack, e.g.
for MP3 players (audio and video)
: 4-pin socket for ⅛ inch stereo jack, e.g.
for MP3 players (audio and video)
; iPod® plug, to connect an iPod®
= USB socket, to connect an MP3 player
? Example of device (iPod®)
Connect the external device with suitable
socket :, ; or =.
COMAND Online activates the device, a
display appears (when connecting an
iPod® plug or USB socket).
If you remove a device, the No device con‐
nected message appears.
i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should
not be simultaneously operated via the
Media Interface and the remote control
(e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directly
via the device itself. Doing so may cause
unforeseen technical difficulties.
Applications (Apps) that are activated on
the connected device may lead to malfunctions.
i Connecting a fully discharged iPod® or
MP3 player can result in an extended initialisation period.
Error messages appear while the device is
being activated if:
Rthe
connected device is not supported
(External device unavailable message).
Rthe connected device consumes too much
power
Audio
Transfer Protocol) can be used.
This allows the MP3 player to be easily connected to the Media Interface and removed
after use. Audio data is played without
problem.
On some MP3 players, you have to activate
the relevant function; see the MP3 player
operating instructions.
Media Interface mode
242
Rthe
RMedia
Ra
Media Interface connection is faulty.
mass storage device (e.g. USB memory
stick or USB hard drive) is connected to the
Media Interface.
In this case the message Please con‐
nect the device to the other USB
port appears.
ROperation
Switching on using a number key
i The separate USB connection ensures
Audio
quick access and expanded media content
options.
i Information is available at any Mercedes-
Interface or audio AUX mode
with Bluetooth® audio
Press the i number key (for a DVD
changer) or the o number key (for a
single DVD drive) number key.
This selects the connected external audio
device directly.
Switching on via the media list
Benz Service Centre.
Switching to Media Interface mode
General notes
In extreme cases, starting up individual functions can take up to several minutes; this
depends on the external device and its content (e.g. video podcasts).
Only use the original software to save files on
iPods® or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or
all functions may not be available.
Switching on automatically
Connect an external device (Y page 241).
COMAND Online activates the device (if
connected via the iPod® connector or USB
socket). . The basic display then appears.
Switching on with the function button
The external device is connected to the Media
Interface.
X Press the h function button one or more
times.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
Media Interface mode (iPod® mode) when equipped with a DVD changer
: Cover (if available) or representation of
device
; Track number
= Elapsed track time (also in format
00:00:00 for audio books)
? Track name
A Graphic time display
B Track position in playlist
C Album name (if available)
D Artist (if available)
E Music search
F Position in the media list
G Data medium type
H Playback options
Select the entry under position 0 (DVD
changer) or position 5 (single DVD drive) in
the media list by turning cVd the COMAND
Media Interface mode
The type of device connected is indicated by
the corresponding symbol for iPod®
(iPhone®) or MP3 player.
The current playback option is shown with a
symbol behind album name (no display for
Normal track sequence) (Y page 246).
i If the device connected does not contain
any playable tracks, a message appears to
this effect.
On the multifunction steering wheel:
switch to Media Interface mode in
COMAND Online(Y page 242).
X On the multifunction steering wheel, press
the = or ; button to select the
Audio menu.
X Press the 9 or : button briefly.
If you hold down the 9 or : button,
the system scrolls through the list more
quickly. Not all media players support this
function.
If track information is available on the
media player, the multifunction display
shows the number and name of the track.
Selecting using the number keypad
Selecting music files
Note
COMAND Online displays the data stored on
the iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player according
to the file structure used in the respective
medium.
Selecting by skipping to a track
To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track. The skip back function skips to the
beginning of the current track if the track
has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less
than eight seconds, it skips to the start of
the previous track. If you have selected a
playback option other than Normal track
sequence, the track sequence is random.
To make an entry: press the l button.
An input menu appears. The number of
characters available for input depends on
the number of stored tracks.
To enter a track number: press a number
key, e.g. q.
The digit is entered in the first position in
the input line.
i COMAND Online will ignore and not display an invalid digit.
X Enter more numbers if desired.
The track plays after the last possible number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number key for
more than two seconds completes the
entry, and the corresponding track is
played.
Fast forward/rewind
While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
Press and hold the F or E button
until the desired position is reached.
Audio
controller and press W to confirm
(Y page 220).
COMAND Online activates the connected
device. You will see a message to this
effect. The basic display then appears.
If no device is connected, you will see the
Media Interface entry instead of a
device name.
243
244
Media Interface mode
i On an iPod® or iPhone®, fast rewind only
Calling up the category list
functions within the current track.
Selecting a category/playlist/folder
Audio
Overview
For an iPod®, iPhone® or certain MP3 players,
you can select tracks using categories or folders.
Depending on the device connected, the following categories may be available, for example:
RCurrent
tracklist
by cover
RKeyword search
RPlaylists (e.g. All)
RArtists
RAlbums
RTracks
RPodcasts
RGenres
RComposers
RAudiobooks
RVideos
RSelect
i Some playback categories contain the
entry All. If this entry has been selected,
the entire content of the category selected
will be played.
The Videos category is available for
iPods® and iPhones®.
i The functions are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and
analysed. For certain functions, such as
keyword search and selection by cover, this
can take several minutes, depending on the
scope of media and the connected device.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these functions
are available much more quickly.
However, if you change the media content,
it has to be read and analysed again.
Example: category list
Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The category list appears.
i Search is not available until the device
has been activated.
i Reading: if the media content of the con-
nected device is being read, this is indicated on the upper right by a symbol. When
reading has ended, the categories Select
by cover and Keyword search are available.
Depending on the connected device and
the size of the media content, reading may
take several minutes. When the device is
next started or reconnected, the advanced
functions will be quickly available.
However, if you change the media content
on your iPod®/iPhone®, it has to be read
and analysed again.
Media Interface mode
245
To switch to the next folder up: slide
XV the COMAND controller.
or
Press the % back button.
Playing back the contents of a category
or folder
Example: current track list
: Symbol for next folder up
; Device symbol and device name
= Track symbol
? Current track
Select the category or folder by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
than two seconds.
The content of the category or folder selected is played according to the playback
option selected (Y page 246).
Alphabetical track selection
Example: current track list
: Symbol for next folder up
; Device symbol and device name
= Track symbol
? Current track
Select Current tracklist by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The content of the current track list
appears.
X Select the track by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The track is played.
iPod®, iPhone® and MP3 player
This function is available for alphabetically
sorted categories and folders. This function
is not available for albums or playlists, for
example.
X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available artists are displayed.
Press the corresponding number key once
or repeatedly to select the initial letter of
the desired artist. For example, to select an
artist whose name begins with C, press the
l number key three times.
The available letters are listed at the lower
edge of the display.
After a message, the first entry in the list
that matches the letter entered is highlighted.
i If no corresponding entry exists, the last
entry corresponding to a previous letter is
highlighted instead.
i iPods and MP3 players: the quality of the
search results is highly dependent on the
version and language variant of the software used to populate the device. A wellZ
Audio
246
Media Interface mode
known example of such software is
iTunes®.
If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in
iTunes®), the search is cancelled without
any result.
Additional selection functions
Playback options
To select a playback option: select
Media Interface in the basic display by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
Select an option and press W to confirm.
RSelect
Audio
by cover
Albums can be chosen by cover using the
menu item.
The first time the Select by cover function is used, additional data must be loaded
from the iPod®/iPhone®. The current
music playback is interrupted to allow
access to this data. The process may take
a few minutes and should not be cancelled.
Otherwise it will start again from the beginning the next time Select by cover is
selected. Covers are initially searched for
in the Gracenote Media Database and are
then added to during playback from the
connected device (Y page 222). The availability depends on the use and the tracks
already selected.
RKeyword search
Selecting keyword search allows you to
search through all categories on the connected device for keywords.
firming a new track, the Function
unavailable message appears.
i For more information on Select by
cover and Keyword search can be found
under "Music search, selecting category"
(Y page 244).
i For an
iPod®/iPhone®,
the available covers are added most efficiently if the entire
media content is in the current playlist. This
is the case if you have selected the playback option Title or Random
media(Y page 246).
Special feature in iPod®/iPhone® mode
i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not
functioning or paused, you can search for
tracks but cannot select them. After con-
The following options are available:
RNormal
track sequence
Normal track sequence: you hear the
tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical
or alphabetical).
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom tracks
The tracks in the currently active category
or folder, including any subfolders, are
played in random order.
i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not
functioning or paused, the playback
options are inactive. The display of options
is greyed out.
MP3 player instructions
General information
Up to 30,000 tracks per medium are supported.
You can speed up some functions and
improve the search results by:
Rmaking
sure the names of tracks, albums
and artists, for example, are written the
same way
Rlabelling albums featuring various artists as
"compilations"
Audio AUX mode
i Multiple entries of tracks in playlists are
filtered out for some players.
Data formats
Switching to audio AUX mode
Switching on with the function button
MP3 and WMA are supported as data formats
with fixed and variable bit rates (up to
320 kbit/s).
The external device is connected to the Audio
Aux source.
X Press the h function button one or more
times.
Special considerations when using MP3
players
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files are not supported by the Media
Interface.
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
ROperation with Bluetooth® audio
Audio
Up to 8 directory levels with up to 1,000
tracks per directory are supported.
Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.
They can impair functionality.
RMemory
Switching on with the audio menu
Audio AUX mode
Notes on audio AUX mode
The varying volumes of external audio sources can mean that system messages (e.g.
traffic and navigation announcements) are
played at a noticeably increased volume. If
necessary, deactivate the system messages
or adjust their volume manually.
You can connect an external audio source
(AUX) to COMAND Online. You will find the
socket in the centre console stowage compartment.
If COMAND Online is equipped with a Media
Interface, external audio sources are connected using the cable set provided. The cable
set then replaces the audio AUX socket. The
connections for the Media Interface are located in the stowage compartment in the centre
console.
247
When you connect an external audio source,
audio AUX is not selected automatically.
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch to audio AUX mode in the
audio menu.
X Select Audio using ZV and press W to
confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Aux using cVd and press W to confirm.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium
in the external audio source is played if the
source is connected and playback selected.
i You can find more information on the
Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect and in the "Media
Interface mode" section (Y page 240).
Audio AUX mode
248
Audio
the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume
cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is
possible to adjust the volume separately. In
this case, start at a medium volume and
increase it gradually. This enables you to
determine whether the system is able to play
the music at high volume without distorting
it.
Please see the respective operating instructions for how to operate the external audio
source.
Information on:
settings (Y page 30)
settings (Y page 31)
RVolume
RSound
Increasing the volume on COMAND
Online
Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external audio
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external audio
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
A device which is connected as an external
audio source may seem quieter or louder in
249
250
250
250
251
259
265
266
Video
Features of your COMAND Online ...
General notes ....................................
Basic settings ....................................
TV mode .............................................
Video DVD mode ...............................
Video AUX operation ........................
Picture viewer ...................................
250
Basic settings
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Where operating steps can be carried out in
the active main function using the number
keys, the following functions are not possible:
Rselecting
TV channels from the channel
presets
Rstoring TV channels in the channel presets
Basic settings
General notes
Video
Automatic picture shutoff
If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 5 km/h, the picture automatically
switches off in the following modes:
RTV
mode (with teletext)
DVD mode
The following message appears in the display:
In order not to distract you from
the traffic situation, the picture
is faded out while the vehicle is in
motion.
As soon as the vehicle speed drops below
about 5 km/h, the picture switches back on
again.
RVideo
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
colour
The following describes the TV, video DVD
and video AUX modes.
X In TV or video DVD mode, press W the
COMAND controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Set the value between - 5 and + 5 and press
W to confirm.
Background video mode
If another main function is active, e.g. navigation, you can perform the following operations in TV and video DVD mode. A window
shows information about the selected function.
Using the E or F button, you can:
Rselect
Rselect
a TV channel
a scene or chapter (video DVD
mode)
forward or rewind (video DVD mode)
Rfast
Changing the picture format
The following describes the TV, video DVD
and video AUX modes.
X In TV or video DVD mode, press W the
COMAND controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Automatic, 16:9 optimised, 4:3
or Widescreen and press W to confirm.
The dot in front of the entry indicates the
currently selected format.
TV mode
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
251
If another mode is switched on, you can
now switch to TV mode in the video menu.
X Select TV and press W to confirm.
If the TV channel that was previously selected is still receivable, it will be displayed.
TV mode
Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may
seriously impair TV reception.
The TV tuner is designed to receive digital TV
channels compliant with the DVB-T standard.
If the reception deteriorates, the TV receiver
automatically switches to an alternative digital frequency transmitting the same programme content with better reception.
Showing/hiding the control menu
Video
Reception quality
i In some countries, DVB-T may not be
available, or may not be available in all
areas.
The constantly changing reception conditions
while the vehicle is in motion can interrupt the
signal. If the reception is too poor,
COMAND Online can switch off the sound and
freeze or hide the picture. To indicate this, an
icon of a radio tower with a line through it
appears in the display.
Control menu displayed
: Preset position of the selected TV channel
; Selected TV channel/number
= Current programme
? Next TV channel in the channel list (chan-
nel name or number)
A Shows the menu
B Previous TV channel in the channel list
Switching to TV mode
(channel name or number)
To show the control menu: slide ZVÆ or
turn cVd the COMAND controller.
i If you turn the COMAND controller, the
next/previous station is selected.
X To hide the control menu: slide ZVÆ the
COMAND controller.
or
X Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Video menu
Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If TV mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be highlighted.
TV mode
252
Showing/hiding the menu
Setting a channels from the channel list
After starting the vehicle or switching on
COMAND Online, all receivable TV and radio
stations are listed by the reception function.
The respective channel list contains the following information, if it is transmitted and can
be received:
Rthe
Video
Menu shown
: TV options
; Channel preset list
= Information about the current programme
? To switch on teletext
A Sound settings
To show the control menu: press W the
COMAND controller.
or
Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press W to confirm.
X To hide the control menu: slide ZV the
COMAND controller and confirm Full
screen by pressing W.
i Information about current programme
= and teletext ? are not supported by all
TV standards or TV channels in all countries.
Selecting TV channels
Selecting channels using the control
menu
Turn cVd the COMAND controller.
or
Slide XVY the COMAND controller.
or
Press the E or F button.
The TV tuner selects the previous or next
channel from the alphabetical channel list.
names of the channels that can be
received
Rthe name of the current and next programme on each channel
The background reception function requires
a certain amount of time to update this information. COMAND Online can only display the
information if the TV channels are transmitting it and if the reception conditions are adequate. The electronic programme guide (EPG)
provides the titles of the current and upcoming programmes.
The order of the channel list is country-specific.
X To set a channel using
COMAND Online: press W the COMAND
controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select TV channel list or Radio sta‐
tion list and press W to confirm.
The channel list appears. The # dot in front
of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel. A number before the list entry
shows the memory slot in the channel presets.
Select the channel and press W to confirm.
To set a channel using the multifunction steering wheel: switch on TV mode
in COMAND Online(Y page 251).
X Press the = or ; button to select the
Audio menu.
X Press and hold the 9 or : button.
TV mode
Channel presets
Selecting a channel in COMAND Online:
Option 1: press W the COMAND controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot in front of a preset position indicates
that the currently selected channel is
stored there.
X Select and confirm a channel by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
X Option 2: briefly press one or two number
keys.
To select a channel from a single-digit preset, briefly press the s number key, for
example.
To select a channel from a double-digit
memory position, briefly press the l
and m number keys, for example.
If a channel was saved, the storage number
and channel name appear and COMAND
Online sets the channel.
Saving a TV channel automatically or manually (Y page 254).
Selecting channels by entering the
channel and programme number
Several programmes can be transmitted on
one channel with digital TV. You can therefore
enter a channel and the desired programme
on this channel.
X Step 1: to call up the input line for the
channel number: press l during TV
playback.
or
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel entry and press W to
confirm.
The input line for the four-digit channel
number appears.
Step 2: to enter a channel/programme
number: press the corresponding number
keys.
As soon as you have entered the channel/
programme number, COMAND Online sets
the channel/station.
If you only enter the first two or three digits
of the channel/programme number, the
first receivable programme will be set
within the programme series.
If you have not entered a programme number, the first programme with adequate
reception will be set.
If you enter channels that are either not intended for or not allowed in your country, the
Invalid channel number message
appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller and confirm the message.
i You can enter channel numbers or programmes available in your country even if
the reception is currently not adequate.
Video
Setting channels via the channel presets
253
254
TV mode
Information on channel numbers available
in your country can be found on the website
of the private or public broadcaster.
Storing TV channels
Video
Storing channels manually
You can manually store up to 40 TV channels
in preset positions.
X Option 1: press one or two number keys
while a TV programme is playing, until a
tone can be heard.
To save a channel to a single-digit memory
position, briefly press the s number
key, for example.
To save a channel to a double-digit memory
position, briefly press the l number
key, for example. Then within three seconds, press and hold m, for example.
The current channel is stored under the
corresponding preset. The TV picture then
reappears.
or
X Option 2: press W the COMAND controller.
The menu is shown.
X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot in front of a preset position indicates
that the channel currently selected is
stored there.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller to select
the desired preset position.
X To store a channel, press and hold W the
COMAND controller until you hear a tone.
The previously saved channel is overwritten.
Storing channels automatically
TV channels are automatically stored on the
first 20 of the 40 preset positions in total.
Receivable channels are stored in order of
reception quality. The current preset channels in positions 1 – 20 are manually overwritten.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online searches for channels
with adequate reception. The available
channels are automatically stored in the
preset positions.
Information about the current programme
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Info by sliding XVY or turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You will see the information if it is provided
by the selected TV channel or radio station.
The information field otherwise remains
empty.
X To display multi-page information, turn
cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
i It may take a few seconds for the information to appear.
Displaying the current programme or
programme preview
This function is available if the selected TV
channel or radio station transmits the necessary information.
TV mode
i Entering characters using the number
keypad (Y page 37).
Switch back by sliding VY.
To display the programme preview: slide
VY the COMAND controller to the right.
The channel list shows the channel's next
programme.
Video
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select TV channel list or Radio sta‐
tion list.
The selected channel list appears. It shows
the current programme on the digital TV
channels or digital radio stations which
have adequate reception. The # dot in front
of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel.
255
: To display the current programme
; Channel name
= The beginning and end of the programme
? Title of the next programme
A Current channel
: Alphabetical browser
A Title of the current programme
To display the current programme: slide
XV the COMAND controller to the left.
X To close the display: press the % back
button.
The alphabetical browser cannot be activated in the programme preview.
B Current channel
i The programme preview is also referred
; Channel name
= To display the programme preview
? Visual display of the elapsed programme
time (if this information is broadcast)
To activate the alphabetical browser:
slide XV the COMAND controller to the
left.
X Select the initial letter of the desired channel name by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
or
X To select the letter B, for example, press
the l number key twice in quick succession.
The programme display changes to the
appropriate channel.
to as the electronic programme guide
(EPG).
Basic TV settings
Fixing the frequency
Depending on reception levels, country or TV
standard, the TV tuner automatically switches
to an alternative channel with better reception if it is broadcasting the same programme
content. You can use the Channel fix function to prevent this channel switching. This is
useful e. g. if there is a disruptive time delay
Video
256
TV mode
between the channels or if you do not wish
the tuner to switch channels automatically.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel fix and confirm with W.
X The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status. When
the function is switched on, FIX appears in
the display window.
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller or press the % back button.
i The setting is only valid for the currently
selected channel.
Setting the reception region
COMAND Online is set to the correct reception region at the factory. If you are driving
your vehicle in a different country or region,
you should set COMAND Online accordingly.
In an incorrect reception area, channels may
not be found or characters may be incorrectly
displayed. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
can help you to select the correct reception
region.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select TV standard and press W to confirm.
A list appears showing the reception
regions. The # dot in front of a list entry
indicates the currently selected reception
area or country.
Select the reception area and press W to
confirm.
A message appears to inform you that if the
wrong country is set, correct reception will
not be possible.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND Online will
switch to the country setting you have
selected.
If you select No, the country list will appear
again.
Teletext
Introduction
Teletext and data service functions are not
supported by all TV standards in all countries.
Teletext can only be received if there is no
interference in the picture reception. The teletext or data service functions receive and
save all teletext pages for the currently selected channel in the system memory. This
excludes any subpages. If you set a different
channel, the memory is cleared and refilled.
Switching teletext on/off
TV mode
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X To switch on: select Teletext by sliding
XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X To switch off: press and hold the %
back button.
The TV picture appears.
Selecting a teletext page
To access a page directly: press the corresponding number keys.
X To access the previous/next page: turn
cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899.
Dynamic teletext page
A dynamic teletext page consists of several
subpages.
X To select a subpage: slide
XVY the COMAND controller.
Digital teletext (MHEG-5)
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X To switch on: select Teletext by sliding
XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
When the data contents are displayed, turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The menu bar appears at the bottom of the
picture.
X To select a colour: select Red, Green,
Yellow or Blue by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Press W to confirm.
The contents of the selected colour are displayed.
X To navigate to the page: when the menu
bar is displayed, slide ZVÆ the COMAND
controller.
The menu bar disappears.
X Slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
select contents from the page.
X Press W to confirm.
To return to the TV programme: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select TV by turning cVd the COMAND
controller.
or
X Press and hold the % back button on the
left next to the COMAND controller.
Selecting audio
In addition to TV and radio programmes, you
can also use interactive multimedia applications such as weather forecasts, news
reports and sports results.
Digital teletext is only available in some countries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand.
Video
257
Video
258
TV mode
If a multilingual broadcast is received, you can
select the audio channel you would like to
hear. With Audio 1 you can select the main
channel, with Audio 2 you can choose an
additional audio track.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X To switch on: select TV by sliding XVY or
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Audio 1 or Audio 2 by sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates the
selected setting.
The audio channel switches over, e.g. to
another language.
To call up the menu: when the television
picture is shown, press W the COMAND
controller to show the menu.
X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Further options by sliding ZVÆ
or turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: select Exit and press
W to confirm.
Selecting language and subtitles
Further options
Overview
You can use this function to:
Rselect
audio languages
subtitles on/off and select the subtitle language
Rselect a country-specific character set
Rperform channel list settings
Rreset adjustments
Rswitch
The "TV - further options" menu
In the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, confirm Language & Subtitles by pressing
W the COMAND controller (Y page 258).
A menu appears.
X To select the language: confirm Audio
Language by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Prefer COMAND language or one
of the available audio languages.
Prefer COMAND language selects the system language currently set for COMAND
Online. Switch the setting on O or off ª.
If you select one of the available audio languages, e.g. English, this setting is used for
the current program. If Prefer COMAND
language is activated as well, this setting
is then used for the following programme.
X To select subtitles: select Subtitles by
sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Video DVD mode
Select Subtitles and press W to confirm.
Switch the subtitles on O or off ª.
X Select Prefer COMAND language or one
of the available audio languages.
Prefer COMAND language selects the system language currently set for COMAND
Online. Switch the setting on O or off ª.
X To exit the menu: select Back and press
W to confirm.
Settings
259
To reset the settings: select Reset.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to reset.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes, the settings are reset
to the factory settings. No cancels the procedure.
X To exit the menu: select 0. Back and
press W to confirm.
Video DVD mode
G WARNING
In the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, confirm Settings by pressing W the
COMAND controller (Y page 258).
A menu appears.
X Country-specific character set: select
1. country-specific character set
and press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
i You can change the setting from channelspecific to country-specific character set
via the reception region setting (TV standard) (Y page 256).
To perform station list settings: select
2. Station List Settings by sliding
ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display free-to-air TV Sta‐
tions, Display free-to-air Radio
Stations or Display data-serviceonly Stations.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These
laser beams may damage your retina. There
is a risk of injury.
You must not open the casing. Always have
maintenance work and repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Handling discs while driving will distract you
from traffic conditions. You could then lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is stationary.
Bear in mind that, at a speed of only
50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering a
distance of 14 m per second.
Notes on discs
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage
COMAND Online. Stickers can cause the
disc to bend, which can result in read errors
and disc recognition problems.
! COMAND Online is designed to play discs
which comply with the EN 60908 standard.
Video
Important safety notes
260
Video DVD mode
Video
Therefore, you can only use discs with a
maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the device.
Only use round discs with a diameter of
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of
8 cm, even with an adapter.
You may encounter playback problems when
playing copied discs. There are a large variety
of discs, DVD authoring software, writing
software and writers available. This variety
means that there is no guarantee that the
system will be able to play discs that you have
copied yourself.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions will be temporarily
blocked or may not function at all. As soon as
you try to activate these functions or actions,
you will see the K symbol in the display.
Inserting and removing DVDs
Proceed as described in the "Inserting and
ejecting CDs and DVDs" section
(Y page 214).
Switching to video DVD mode
Switching on automatically
DVD playback requirements
There are video DVDs available on the market
that do not conform to the current standards.
Such DVDs may have picture, sound or other
playback problems.
COMAND Online is capable of playing back
video DVDs produced according to the following standards:
code 2 (for Europe) or region code
0 (no region code)
RPAL or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
Single DVD drive: insert a video DVD.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
DVD changer: insert a video DVD.
Press h.
or
RRegion
i If you insert a video DVD with a different
region code, you will see a message to this
effect.
i COMAND Online is set to region code 2
at the factory. This setting can be changed
at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This
will allow you to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are
produced in accordance with the PAL or
NTSC standard. The region code can be
changed a maximum of five times.
Press the % back button.
COMAND Online loads the medium inserted and starts to play it.
Switching on with the function button
Press the h function button.
COMAND Online switches to the disc operating mode previously set.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
Raudio
CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 in the
DVD changer or single DVD drive (disc
mode)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB memory
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
Roperation with Bluetooth® audio
Video DVD mode
261
DVD changer: select Media by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Single DVD drive: select Media by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a ý video DVD from the media list
(Y page 263).
Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If video DVD mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active.
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to video DVD mode in the
video menu.
Navigation menu displayed
: Data medium type
; Current track
= Current scene
Video
Switching on with the video menu
? Track time
A Shows the menu
i This function is not available while the
DVD menu is being displayed.
Select Video by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The video menu appears.
X Select DVD-V and press W to confirm.
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
To show: in video DVD mode, slide ZVÆ
the COMAND controller.
To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: in full-screen video DVD mode,
press W the COMAND controller.
or
Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press W to confirm.
To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full screen by pressing W.
or
Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Menu shown
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
Video DVD mode
262
? Media media selection
Pause function
A Sound settings
i This function is not available while the
DVD menu is being displayed.
Fast forward/rewind
In full-screen video DVD mode, slide XVY
and hold the COMAND controller until the
desired position is reached.
or
Video
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
You see the navigation menu.
Stop function
Show the menu (Y page 261).
To interrupt playback: select É by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to
confirm.
or
During playback, confirm É by pressing
W twice in rapid succession.
Ì is selected.
To restart playback: confirm Ì by
pressing W.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
Show the menu (Y page 261).
To pause playback: select Ë by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes or chapters,
you can select them directly while the film is
running, or skip forwards step by step. Some
DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.
during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene/
chapter from within the menu stored on the
DVD.
X To skip forwards or back: in full-screen
mode, turn cVd the COMAND controller
or
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller
or
X Press the E or F button on the control panel.
The navigation menu (Y page 261) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
On the multifunction steering wheel:
switch to video DVD mode in
COMAND Online (Y page 260).
X Use the = or ; button to select the
Audio menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
scene/chapter.
If you press and hold the 9 or : button for an extended period, rapid scroll
begins.
Video DVD mode
Selecting a film/title
263
If equipped with a single DVD drive:
press W the COMAND controller.
COMAND Online loads the video DVD and
begins playing it.
This function is only available if the DVD is
divided into several films/titles. If the DVD
contains several films, these can be selected
directly. A film can be selected either when
the DVD is being played back or when it is
stopped.
The film can also be selected from the menu
on the DVD itself.
X Show the menu (Y page 261).
X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Title selection by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select a film/title and press W to confirm.
Selecting a video DVD from the media
list
Show the menu (Y page 261).
Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates
the current medium being played. Video
DVDs are indicated by the ý icon.
i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an
MP3 medium, you switch to the respective
audio mode.
For further information about the media
list; see (Y page 220).
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the
DVD menu.
X Show the menu (Y page 261).
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Menu and press W to confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Video
DVD function menu
If equipped with a DVD changer: press
W the COMAND controller to display all
magazine trays.
X Select the video DVD by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND Online loads the video DVD and
begins playing it.
Video DVD mode
264
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
X Select Go up and press W to confirm.
Going back to the film
Press the % back button repeatedly
until you see the movie.
or
Video
Show the DVD menu (Y page 263).
Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
Select a menu item by sliding XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The menu appears.
To reconfirm your selection: confirm
Select by pressing W.
COMAND Online carries out the action.
Make a selection from the further options,
if necessary.
COMAND Online then switches back to the
DVD menu.
i Menu items that cannot be selected are
shown in grey.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items:
Back (to the movie), Play, Stop, K,
L or Go up may either not function at
all or may not function at certain points in
the DVD menu. To indicate this, the K
symbol appears in the display.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
or
Show the DVD menu (Y page 263).
Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
Select the corresponding menu item from
the DVD menu.
Select the Back (to the movie) menu
item in the menu and press W to confirm.
Setting the language and audio format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the DVD menu language, the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is dependent on
the DVD content. It may also be possible to
access the settings from the DVD menu
(Y page 263).
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 263).
X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Menu language or Audio lan‐
guage and press W to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It may also be possible to access
the settings from the DVD menu.
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 263).
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and
press W to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot
in front of an entry indicates the current
setting.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
louder. If necessary, deactivate the system
messages or adjust their volume manually.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Media
Interface, you can connect an external video
source.
You require an additional audio/video cable
set to connect an external video source to the
Media Interface.
For more details, please contact a MercedesBenz Service Centre or visit http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Then,
follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section.
You will find the connection sockets in the
centre console stowage compartment.
Interactive content
DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a
video game). In a video game, for example,
you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
Audio/video sockets
: Video port (V) (yellow)
; Audio port (L) (white)
= Audio port (R) (red)
i For correct playback, a suitable video
standard must be set at the external video
source.
Connect the external device to the corresponding port.
Video AUX operation
Connecting external video sources
External video sources may have different
volumes, which can mean that system messages such as traffic announcements and
navigation system announcements are much
265
Video
Video AUX operation
Picture viewer
266
Switching to video AUX mode
Video
Video AUX mode
Press the h function button repeatedly
until Media Interface mode is selected.
or
Select Video in the main function bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
If video AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active.
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to video AUX mode in the
video menu.
X Select Video and press W to confirm.
X Select Aux and press W to confirm.
The video AUX menu appears. You will hear
and see the content of the external video
source if it is connected and switched to
playback.
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: in video AUX mode, press W the
COMAND controller.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full screen by pressing W.
Volume and sound settings
Information on:
settings (Y page 30)
settings (Y page 31)
RVolume
RSound
i A device which is connected as an external video source may seem quieter or
louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum
volume cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables
you to determine whether the system is
able to play the sound at high volume without distorting it.
Increasing the volume on COMAND
Online
Show the video AUX menu (Y page 266).
Select Volume by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external video
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external video
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
Picture viewer
Introduction
If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can view them. You can display
pictures with a resolution of up to 20 megapixels.
Data medium
Supported picture
formats
CD/DVD with picture files
bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
USB devices (sticks, bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
hard drives)
SD memory card
Picture viewer
267
Calling up the category list
Select a data medium with pictures (e.g. a
memory card):
Rin the Audio menu (Y page 208)
Rin the media list (Y page 220)
Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The category list appears (Y page 227).
Displaying pictures
Select Photos from the category list
(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A folder directory appears.
Select a folder with photos and press W to
confirm.
The folder displays the existing picture files
(example).
Select a photo and press W to confirm.
The photo is displayed and the music is
stopped.
Changing the picture view
Video
While viewing a picture (Y page 267), press
W the COMAND controller.
A menu appears.
To turn the picture clockwise: confirm
Turn clockwise by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
To turn the picture anti-clockwise:
select Turn anticlockwise by turning the
cVd COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller.
Picture viewer
268
To revert to the original size: press W the
COMAND controller.
or
Press the % back button.
Exiting the picture viewer
Video
Select Back to menu in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Features of your COMAND Online ...
Overview ............................................
Basic functions .................................
System settings ................................
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........
TV mode .............................................
Video DVD mode ...............................
Active COMAND source mode .........
AUX mode ..........................................
270
270
276
278
279
283
288
292
295
Rear Seat Entertainment System
269
270
Overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Features of your COMAND Online
This Supplement describes all the standard
and optional equipment for your COMAND
Online system, as available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described.
Overview
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These
laser beams may damage your retina. There
is a risk of injury.
You must not open the casing. Always have
maintenance work and repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If objects such as headphones/headsets or
external audio/video sources are not secured
in the passenger compartment, they can be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, for example in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always stow these items or similar objects
carefully so that they cannot be flung around,
for example in a lockable vehicle stowage
compartment.
Components
The Rear Seat Entertainment System comprises:
Rtwo
screens for the rear behind the frontseat head restraints
Ra remote control
Ra CD/DVD drive
RAUX
jacks on both screens (AUX display)
and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)
Rtwo sets of cordless headphones
Overview
271
: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 272)
; Display
Remote control
Overview
E To select a track; to enter track directly
F To exit a menu (back)
Selecting the screen for the remote control
: To switch the screen on/off
; To switch the button lighting on/off
= To select the screen for the remote con?
trol
To select a menu or menu item
To confirm a selection or setting
Mute
Adjusting the volume
To skip, fast-forward/fast-rewind
The remote control can be used to operate
one of the two rear-compartment screens or
SPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so,
you must switch the remote control to the
desired screen (Y page 271).
X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumbwheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in the
window.
X To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel = until "R REAR" is highlighted in the window.
X To select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel =
until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the window.
Switching the screen on/off
If the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
lock (see the vehicle Owner's Manual), or if
the key is not inserted, the screens in the rear
will switch off after 30 minutes. Before the
screens switch off, they show a message to
this effect.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Rear-compartment screens
Overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
272
You can switch the screens back on. However, this will discharge the starter battery.
X Point the remote control at the rear-compartment screen that has been selected for
remote operation.
X Press button : on the remote control
(Y page 271).
The respective rear screen switches on or
off.
i You can only switch the screens on using
the remote control if the ignition is
switched on.
Switching the button lighting on/off
Press button ; on the remote control
(Y page 271).
Depending on the previous status, the button lighting is switched on or off.
i If you do not use the remote control for
about 15 seconds, the button lighting
switches off automatically.
Mute
Press button B on the remote control
(Y page 271).
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and confirming your selection
Select a menu/menu item using the
=;9: buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
: CD/DVD slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A CD/DVD eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical connections can be found on the
right-hand side of the rear-compartment
screens (display AUX)(Y page 271).
Overview
273
Cordless headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Overview
: Volume control
; Selects a screen for the headphones
= Battery compartment cover
? Switches the cordless headphones on/off
A Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 274)
Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the
headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
Switching the cordless headphones
on/off
Press button :.
Depending on the previous status, the
headphones are switched on or off. To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not
received an audio signal for approximately
three minutes.
Overview
274
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Adjusting the volume of the headphones
Indicator lamp displays
The colour of the indicator lamp shows
whether the headphones are switched on or
off and indicates the charge level of the batteries inserted.
LED display
Status
Green
The batteries are fine.
Red
The batteries are almost discharged.
Lit continu- The headphones are switched
ously
on and connected to a screen.
Turn volume control : until the desired
volume has been set.
i If you have connected cordless headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you
can adjust the volume using the remote
control (Y page 271).
Selecting a screen for the headphones
Flashing
The headphones are searching for the connection to a
screen.
Off (dark)
The headphones are switched
off or the batteries are discharged.
Connecting additional headphones
You can connect one additional set of corded
headphones to each of the two rear-compartment screens (Y page 271). The socket is
designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm
stereo jack plug and an impedance of
32 ohms.
Replacing batteries
Notes
G WARNING
Move push slider : to L (left-hand screen)
or R (right-hand screen).
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Overview
Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
The batteries can be replaced (Y page 274).
Only valid for South Africa
On the remote control
To open the battery compartment:
remove battery compartment cover = on
the back of the remote control.
X To do so, press down retaining lug ; and
take off battery compartment cover =.
X Remove discharged batteries A from the
tray.
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery
compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
insert battery compartment cover = starting with retaining lugs ? into the battery
compartment and allow catch tab ; to
engage in place.
On the cordless headphones
: Battery compartment cover
: Battery compartment
; Catch tab
= Battery compartment cover
? Retaining lugs
A Batteries
The remote control contains 2 type AAA,
1.5 V batteries.
The cordless headphones contain two type
AAA, 1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment: flip
battery compartment cover : upwards.
As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the
headphones as shown to prevent the batteries from falling out.
X Remove the discharged batteries from the
tray.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
H Environmental note
275
Basic functions
276
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery
compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
press the battery compartment cover
downwards until it engages into place.
If the batteries have been inserted correctly, the indicator lamp will light up green
when the headphones are switched on.
i The operating duration of the headphones
with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.
Basic functions
Using headphones
You can use the cordless headphones supplied and/or up to two sets of corded headphones connected to the corresponding jack
of the rear-compartment screens
(Y page 271).
Information on:
To set on COMAND Online: press the
$ function button to switch on an audio
mode.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Audio menu appears.
X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
i The headphones' volume setting does not
affect the main loudspeakers.
Selecting sound settings
You can select the sound settings in the audio
CD/DVD/MP3, TV, video DVD and AUX
modes.
X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode) (Y page 279).
X Select Treble or Bass using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
RSwitching the cordless headphones on/off
RAdjusting
the volume of the headphones
a screen for the headphones
can be found under "Cordless headphones"
(Y page 273).
RSelecting
Using the main loudspeakers
This function is available in conjunction with
COMAND Online.
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to listen to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment
drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-compartment screens must be set to disc mode.
Multiple users
Simultaneous use of the rear-compartment disc drive
The two rear-compartment screens can be
operated almost entirely independently from
one another. However, there can be a conflict
in some menus if the two screens are used
simultaneously.
If the rear-compartment disc drive is being
used for both screens simultaneously, selecting certain menus or settings on one of the
screens also affects the other screen.
The following functions affect both screens:
Rchanging
playback options
Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)
Rusing
the play, pause and stop functions
Basic functions
forwarding/rewinding or scrolling
up the DVD menu and navigating
within it
Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera
angle
Rcalling up interactive DVD content
The following functions affect only one
screen:
Rcalling
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
colour
Raudio and video functions as well as picture
settings
Rswitching
between full screen and the
menu
Switching between operating modes
When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you
call up this operating mode again later, there
are two possibilities:
Rthe
operating mode has been changed on
the other screen.
Rthe operating mode has not been changed.
In the first case, the operating mode appears
as it is on the other screen.
In the second case, the setting appears on the
screen as it was when you last exited the
operating mode.
Picture settings
Overview
You can select the picture settings in TV,
video DVD and AUX mode(Y page 295).
Example: TV mode
: Brightness, contrast and colour
; Picture formats
Switch on TV mode (Y page 283) or video
DVD mode (Y page 288).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X While the navigation menu is shown, select
(Y page 261)Menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
In both cases, select TV or DVD-Video
using the :=; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
using the 9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
While the navigation menu is shown,
select(Y page 261)Menu and press the 9
button to confirm.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Rfast
277
System settings
278
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Select TV or DVD-V using
the :=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of one of the menu items
16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Widescreen indicates the format currently selected.
X Select a format using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
System settings
Note
You can adjust almost all system settings
individually for each screen without affecting
the other screen. You make these settings
using the remote control(Y page 271).
Changing the display design
Select Settings in the system menu using
the : button on the remote control and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Day design, Night design or
Automatic using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot indicates the current setting.
Design
Explanation
Day design
The display is set permanently to day
design.
Night design
The display is set permanently to night
design.
Automatic
The display design
changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
cluster illumination.
Selecting the display language
Select System using the 9=;
buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
You see the system menu on the selected
rear screen.
Select Settings using the : button
and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of languages appears. A #dot indicates the current setting.
Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System activates the selected language.
Setting the brightness
Select Settings in the system menu using
the : button on the remote control and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
A scale appears.
Adjust the brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in
accordance with the scale.
Hiding/showing the picture
To hide the picture: select Display off
in the system menu using the :;
buttons on the remote control and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The picture is hidden.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
To display the picture: press the 9 button.
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment level, the CD/DVD drive is found:
Rbehind the centre console in a folding com-
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Important safety notes
partment, or
the rear bench seat, or
Rin the stowage box between the rear seats.
Runder
G WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These
laser beams may damage your retina. There
is a risk of injury.
You must not open the casing. Always have
maintenance work and repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
General notes
You will find information on the following topics in the Audio section:
on CDs/DVDs (Y page 227)
on MP3 mode (Y page 225)
RNotes on copyright (Y page 226)
RNotes
RNotes
Inserting a CD/DVD
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If
there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted.
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
The printed side of the disc must face
upwards. If neither side of the disc is printed, the side you wish to play must face
downwards.
The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.
The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:
Rif
it has been inserted correctly and is a
permissible disc, and
Rafter you have switched on disc mode
(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)
(Y page 280).
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded
by the drive. Loading may take some time,
depending on the number of folders and
tracks.
: Disc slot
; Disc eject button
Rear Seat Entertainment System
279
280
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode
Example: audio DVD mode
: Data medium type ü
Example: audio CD mode
: Data medium type _
; Track number
= Track name (if stored on the disc)
; Track number
? Track time
= Track name (only if stored on the disc as
A Graphic time and track display
CD text)
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc as CD
text)
F To call up the track list
G Playback options
X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 279).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the inserted disc.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and confirm by pressing the 9 button.
The corresponding mode is switched on.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays
the disc.
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc)
F To call up the track list
G Stop function
H Pause function
I Playback options
Example: MP3 mode
: Data medium type þ
; Track number
= Track name
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result
in the elapsed time shown being different
to the actual elapsed time.
Selecting a track
or
Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is active.
The track list appears. The # dot indicates
the current track.
Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Making a selection by entering the track
number directly
Selecting by skipping to a track
To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the = or ; button on
the remote control.
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
If the elapsed track time has passed 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed time is
shorter, it will skip to the start of the previous track.
If the Random tracks or Random folder
playback option has been selected, the
track order is random.
Selecting by track list
In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
tracks on the disc currently playing.
In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all
tracks in the currently active group; see "Setting the audio format" (Y page 224).
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks
in the currently active folder as well as the
folder structure, allowing you to select any
track on the MP3 CD.
X Select Track list (audio CD/DVD mode)
or Folder (MP3 mode) using
Press the h button on the remote control.
The track entry display appears.
Example: track 2
Press number button 2.
Example: track 12
Press the corresponding number keys in
rapid succession.
Wait for approximately three seconds after
making the entry.
You will hear the track that has been
entered. The corresponding basic menu
then reappears.
i It is not possible to enter numbers that
exceed the number of tracks on the CD or
in the currently active folder.
Fast forward/rewind
With the display/selection window active,
press the = or ; button on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach
the desired position.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
the :=; buttons on the remote
control, and confirm by pressing the 9
button.
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
To set the bass
To set the treble
Disc name or current folder
To call up the folder list
Playback options, to switch track information on/off
281
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
282
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Selecting a folder
This function is only available in MP3 mode.
X Select Folder in MP3 mode using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
X Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is active.
The folder content appears.
Select a folder using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
X Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The track is played and the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.
Pause function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X To pause playback: select Ë using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ì display changes to Ë.
: Folder selection symbol
; Current folder name
= Track symbol
To switch to the superordinate folder:
select symbol : using the 9: buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
The display shows the next folder up.
: Folder selection symbol
; Folder symbol
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X To interrupt playback: select É using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the
9 button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
To restart playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
TV mode
Further information on audio formats is available in the "Audio" section (Y page 224).
X Select DVD-A using the :=;
buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
X Select Group using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of available audio formats appears.
The # dot indicates the format currently
selected.
X Select an audio format using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Switching track information on/off
(MP3 mode only)
If the function is switched on, folder and track
names are displayed.
If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
X Select MP3 using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
Select Display track information
using the 9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
TV mode
Playback options
Further information on playback options is
available in the "Audio" section
(Y page 225).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option currently selected.
Select Normal track sequence, Random
tracks or Random folder using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal track sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
i If you switch the data carrier which you
are currently listening to, the Normal
track sequence option is activated automatically. If an option is selected, it
remains selected after the Rear Seat Entertainment System is switched on or off.
General notes
Further information on channel reception
quality can be found in the "Video" section
(Y page 251).
Switching to TV mode
Select TV using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
You see the last TV channel selected, provided it can still be received.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Setting the audio format
283
TV mode
284
Showing/hiding the control menu
= Information on the current programme
(only for digital TV channels)
Rear Seat Entertainment System
? To switch on teletext
A To set the treble
B To set the bass
To show: press the 9 button on the
remote control.
or
Control menu displayed
: Preset position of the selected TV channel
; Selected TV channel
Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To hide: press the 9 button, select
Full screen and press the 9 button to
confirm.
= Current programme (digital TV receiver
only)
? Next TV channel in the channel list (chan-
nel name or number)
A Showing the menu
B Previous TV channel in the channel list
(channel name or number)
To show: press the 9 or : button
on the remote control.
X To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
X After approximately eight seconds, the
menu is automatically hidden.
Selecting TV channels
Selecting channels using the control
menu
Press the = or ; button on the
remote control while the display window is
active.
or
Press the E or F button.
The TV tuner selects the previous or next
channel from the alphabetical channel list.
Setting channels via the channel presets
Showing/hiding the menu
Channel presets
TV picture with menu
: To call up the TV options menu
; To call up the channel presets
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates where the selected channel is currently stored.
Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
Option 1: select TV using the =;
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Channel entry and press the 9
button to confirm.
Option 2: press the h button while the
TV is playing.
Irrespective of the option, an input bar
appears at the top of the screen.
To set a channel: enter the channel number using the number keys and press the
9 button to confirm.
Press a number button.
Setting a channel from the channel list
Notes on the channel list can be found in the
"Video" section (Y page 252). Information
regarding COMAND Online also applies to the
Rear Seat Entertainment System.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Station list and press the 9
button to confirm.
The channel list appears. The # dot in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel. A number before the list
entry shows the memory slot in the channel
presets.
enter a channel and the desired programme
on this channel.
Only one programme can be transmitted on
a channel with analogue TV. The programme
entry function therefore has no effect.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
Press and hold the number key until the
entry line is hidden.
The channel is set.
i If you have not entered a programme
number, the first programme with adequate reception will be set for a digital
channel.
i You can enter channels or programmes
available in your country even if the reception is currently not adequate.
If you enter channels that are either not
intended for or not allowed in your country,
the Invalid channel number message
appears.
Selecting channels by entering the
channel and programme number
Several programmes can be transmitted on
one channel with digital TV. You can therefore
285
Rear Seat Entertainment System
TV mode
TV mode
286
Storing TV channels
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Storing channels manually
There are ten preset positions available.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected channel is stored.
To store a channel: select a preset using
the 9: buttons and press and hold
the 9 button until you hear a tone.
Information about the current programme
This function is only available on digital TV
channels. If you are watching an analogue TV
channel, this menu cannot be selected.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
i It can take a few seconds for the information to be displayed.
or
Press and hold a number button until you
hear a tone.
The TV picture then reappears.
Storing channels automatically
This function automatically stores channels
with adequate reception in order of their
reception quality. Any channels stored manually in the preset memory will be lost.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
Select Info using the =; buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
If the current TV channel provides the corresponding information, this will be displayed.
Displaying the current programme or
programme preview
This function is only available on digital TV
channels. The programme preview is also
referred to as the electronic programme
guide (EPG).
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System
searches for channels it can receive. The
available channels are automatically stored
in the preset positions.
: Current TV channel
; To display the programme preview
= Current programme
? Visual display of the elapsed programme
time
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Station list and press the 9
button to confirm.
The channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV channels
with adequate reception. The # dot in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel.
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Channel fix and press the 9 button to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status. When
the function is switched on, FIX appears in
the display window.
X To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Setting the reception region
: To display the current programme
; The beginning and end of the programme
= TV channel
? Next programme
To show the programme preview: select
Display programme preview and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The channel list shows the channel's next
programme.
X To show the current programme: select
Display current programme and press
the 9 button to confirm.
X To close the display: press the % button.
Basic TV settings
Fixing the frequency
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 255).
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 256).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the control
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select TV standard and press the 9 button to confirm.
A list appears showing the reception
regions. The # dot in front of a list entry
indicates the currently selected reception
area or country.
X Select the reception area and press the
9 button to confirm.
A message appears to inform you that if the
wrong country is set, correct reception will
not be possible.
X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button
to confirm.
If you select Yes, the Rear Seat Entertainment System switches the country.
If you select No, the country list will appear
again.
287
Rear Seat Entertainment System
TV mode
Video DVD mode
288
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Teletext
General notes
Switching teletext on/off
DVD playback conditions
You may encounter playback problems when
playing copied discs. There are a large variety
of discs, DVD authoring software, writing
software and writers available. This variety
means that there is no guarantee that the
Rear Seat Entertainment System will be able
to play video DVDs that you have copied yourself.
Other information can be found under Video
(Y page 260). Information regarding
COMAND Online also applies to the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To switch on: select Teletext using the
=; buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The first teletext page is displayed.
X To switch off: press the % back button.
Selecting a teletext page
To select a page directly: press the corresponding number keys on the remote
control.
X To call up the previous/next page: press
the 9 or : button.
i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899.
Dynamic teletext page
A dynamic teletext page consists of several
subpages. The display automatically changes
to the next page after a certain time.
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These
laser beams may damage your retina. There
is a risk of injury.
You must not open the casing. Always have
maintenance work and repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions described in this
section will be temporarily blocked or may not
function at all. As soon as you try to activate
these functions or actions, you will see the
K symbol in the display.
Switching to video DVD mode
Insert a video DVD (Y page 279).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instructions.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and confirm by pressing the 9 button.
If the video DVD fulfils the playback criteria:
the film either starts automatically or the
menu saved on the DVD appears. If the
DVD menu appears, you must start the film
manually.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
Video DVD mode
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
289
To show: press the 9 button on the
remote control.
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To hide: press the 9 button, select
Full screen and press the 9 button to
confirm.
Fast forward/rewind
Control menu
: Data medium type
; Current track
= Current scene
Press and hold the E or F button on
the remote control until the desired position has been reached.
You see the navigation menu.
? Track time
A To show the menu
To show: press the 9 or : button
on the remote control.
To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
Wait for approximately 8 seconds.
Pause function
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To pause playback: select Ë and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Showing/hiding the menu
Stop function
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Menu system
: Video DVD options
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
; Pause function
= Stop function
? To set the treble
A To set the bass
Rear Seat Entertainment System
or
Video DVD mode
290
Rear Seat Entertainment System
To interrupt playback: select É and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the
9 button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
To restart playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Selecting a scene/chapter
General notes
Option 2: while the film is playing, press
the 9 button on the remote control and
show the menu.
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Scene selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X Select 5 using the 9 or : button and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, playback will begin from the
5th scene/chapter after a brief pause.
Selecting a film/title
Option 1:
X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
Also observe the information on the video
DVD mode (Y page 262).
Skipping forwards/backwards
Press the = or ; button on the
remote control.
or
Press the E or F button.
The navigation menu (Y page 261) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly
The examples illustrate how to select scene/
chapter 5.
X Option 1: while the film is playing, press
the h button on the remote control.
X Press the corresponding number key, such
as 5.
Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Title selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X To call up the selection list: press the
9 button.
X Select a film/track.
Option 2:
Video DVD mode
Press button 2.
After a brief pause, the second film is
played.
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the
DVD menu.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System carries out the action or shows a submenu.
X If available, additional options can now be
selected.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then
switches back to the DVD menu.
i Menu items that cannot be selected are
shown in grey.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items:
Back (to the movie), Play,
Stop, ., / or Go up may either not
function at all or may not function at certain
points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,
the K symbol appears in the display.
Stopping a film or skipping to the beginning or end of a scene
Select any menu item from the DVD menu.
The menu appears.
X To stop the film: select the Stop menu
item and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
X To skip to the end of a scene: select
the / menu item and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To skip to the beginning of a scene:
select the . menu item and press the
9 button to confirm.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
Show the DVD menu.
Press the % back button on the remote
control or select the corresponding menu
item in the DVD menu.
or
Select a menu item using the
9:=; buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
X Select Go up and press W to confirm.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Example: selecting film 2
291
Active COMAND source mode
292
Going back to the film
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Press the % back button repeatedly
until you see the film.
or
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select the Back (to the movie) menu
item in the menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
Setting the audio format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the audio language
or the audio format. The number of settings
is dependent on the DVD content. It may also
be possible to access the settings from the
DVD menu.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Audio language and press the 9
button to confirm.
A menu appears after a short while. The
# dot in front of an entry indicates the
currently selected language.
X Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It may also be possible to access
the settings from the DVD menu.
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Interactive content
DVDs may also contain interactive content
(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may
be able to influence events, for example, by
selecting and triggering actions. The type and
number of actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action using the
9;:= buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X Press the 9 button.
Active COMAND source mode
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND Online
You can transfer an audio or video source
selected in COMAND Online to the Rear Seat
Entertainment System. If you subsequently
switch modes in COMAND Online, the new
source will not be transmitted to the Rear
Seat Entertainment System.
Active COMAND source mode
To switch on the function in COMAND
Online: switch to the desired audio mode
in COMAND Online, e.g. CD mode
(Y page 218), or show the menu in video
DVD mode (Y page 261).
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Select Active audio/video source in
rear and press W to confirm.
Select Rear audio/video off_ and
press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
Selecting an active COMAND source
in the rear-compartment screen
Loading the active COMAND source
Select COMAND using the 9=;
buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
The audio or video source selected in
COMAND Online is loaded in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
When the loading process is complete, the
audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
If Rear audio/video off is activated in
COMAND, the COMAND is off or there
is no active COMAND source message
appears.
In the status bar at the top, you will see the
headphones symbol and the _ symbol for
the source that has been switched on.
X To switch off the function in COMAND
Online: switch on the desired audio mode
in COMAND Online or show the menu in
video DVD mode.
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
293
Active COMAND source mode
294
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Audio CD mode
To skip to the next/previous group:
press the : button on the remote control.
X Highlight with the = or ; or b or
c button and press 9 to confirm.
Additional setting option:
RAdjusting
the sound settings (Y page 276)
i Information on groups can be found in the
"Setting the audio format" section
(Y page 224).
Example: CD mode
To select by skipping to a track: press
the = or ; button.
MP3 mode
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
Additional setting option:
RAdjusting
the sound settings (Y page 276)
Audio DVD mode
Example: MP3 mode
or
Example: audio DVD mode
To select a track by skipping to a
track: press the = or ; button on
the remote control.
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
To select a folder: press the : button
on the remote control.
X Highlight one of the two folder symbols
with the = or ; button and press
9 to confirm.
Depending on your selection, the previous
or next folder is selected and the first track
is played.
AUX mode
RAdjusting
the sound settings (Y page 276)
Video DVD mode
Connecting AUX equipment
AUX drive
The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/
DVD drive on the right next to the CD/DVD
eject button (Y page 272).
AUX display
The AUX display jacks are on the side of the
screen (Y page 271).
Audio and video connection
Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
signals into the corresponding L and R
jacks.
Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Example: video DVD mode
To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the
9 button.
The video image is played in full screen
mode.
Additional setting options:
RAdjusting
the brightness, contrast and colour (Y page 277)
RChanging the picture format (Y page 277)
RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 276)
Switching to AUX mode
AUX drive
Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The AUX menu appears.
AUX mode
Introduction
You can connect one external video source to
each of the displays of the Rear Seat Entertainment System (AUX display) and also one
external video source to the rear-compartment drive (AUX drive) with a sound and video
signal.
Please see the corresponding operating
instructions for information on how to operate the external video source.
For further details about external video sources, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
AUX menu
Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Disc drive Aux and press the 9
button to confirm.
You will hear and see the content of the
external video source if it is connected to
the CD/DVD drive and switched to playZ
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Additional setting option:
295
AUX mode
296
Rear Seat Entertainment System
back. If no video image is available from the
AUX source connected, you will see an
audio menu.
AUX display
Select a screen using the thumbwheel on
the remote control (Y page 271) until "L
REAR" (left-hand screen) or "R REAR" (righthand screen) is highlighted in the window.
X Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Display Aux and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see and hear the content of the
video source if it is switched to playback. If
no video image is available from the AUX
source connected, you will see an audio
menu.
Setting treble and bass
Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu
and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
colour
Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
and press the 9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select 16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Wide‐
screen using the 9: buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of a menu item indicates
the current setting.
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or
suggestions you may have regarding this
Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
As at 28.08.2012
É1725845481Z102dËÍ
1725845481Z102
Order no. 6515 6981 02 Part no. 172 584 54 81 Z102 Edition ÄJ 2013-1a
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract
Page Count                      : 300
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Language                        : EN
Title                           : ÿþy
Author                          : Owner: y.io.creator
Keywords                        : Stylesheet-Version, 3.7.5.1, (SAXON, 8.9, from, Saxonica)
Creator                         : XSL Formatter V4.3 MR8a (4,3,2009,0731) for Windows
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2012:12:20 15:32:49+01:00
Modify Date                     : 2012:12:20 15:32:49+01:00

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools